TRBOnet PLUS

User Manual
Version 6.1

USA Office Sales

Neocom Software EMEA: +44 203 608 0598 www.trbonet.com
150 South Pine Island Rd., Suite 300 Americas: +1 872 222 8726 [email protected]
Plantation, FL 33324, USA APAC: +61 28 607 8325
Notices
This document is for informational purposes only. Neocom Software offers no
warranties, express or implied, in this document.
Neocom and the Neocom logo, TRBOnet and the TRBOnet logo are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Neocom Software, Ltd.
MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC.
Intellectual property rights protect the voice coding technology embodied in this
product including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice
Systems, Inc. This voice coding technology is licensed solely for use within this
communications equipment. U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,199,037, 5,870,405, 5,754,974,
5,664,051, 5,630,011, 5,517,511, 5,491,772, 5,247,579, 5,226,108, 5,226,084,
5,216,747 and 5,081,681.
Microsoft, Windows, SQL Server and the .NET logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other jurisdictions.
Other product or company names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their
respective owners.

© 2022 by Neocom Software, Ltd. All rights reserved.

This document was last revised on August 16, 2022.

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Contents
1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 About This Guide and Related Documentation ................................................... 1
1.2 About TRBOnet ....................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Contacts................................................................................................................... 1
2 Hardware and Software Requirements ........................................................................... 2
3 System Architecture Overview ......................................................................................... 3
3.1 TRBOnet Server, Agent and Console .................................................................... 3
3.2 MOTOTRBO Radio Systems ................................................................................... 4
3.3 IP Backend Network Requirements...................................................................... 8
4 TRBOnet PLUS and Dependencies Installation............................................................... 9
4.1 Installing Microsoft SQL Server............................................................................. 9
4.2 Installing .NET Components .................................................................................. 9
4.3 Installing TRBOnet PLUS........................................................................................ 9
5 TRBOnet Server................................................................................................................ 11
5.1 License Information ............................................................................................. 11
5.2 TRBOnet Server Database ................................................................................... 14
5.3 TRBOnet Server Service ....................................................................................... 17
5.4 Network Parameters ............................................................................................ 17
5.5 Reports .................................................................................................................. 20
5.6 Backup Configuration .......................................................................................... 21
5.7 Service Management ........................................................................................... 21
5.8 Advanced Settings ................................................................................................ 24
5.9 Radio Systems....................................................................................................... 29
5.10 PTT over Cellular................................................................................................... 82
5.11 Teltonika ................................................................................................................ 84
5.12 Remote Agents ..................................................................................................... 84
5.13 Friendly Servers .................................................................................................... 87
5.14 Phone Connect ..................................................................................................... 88
5.15 Data Sources ......................................................................................................... 95
5.16 Email Settings ....................................................................................................... 99
5.17 SMS Notifications ............................................................................................... 103
5.18 Push Notifications .............................................................................................. 105

i
 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console ........................................................................................... 106
6.1 Connecting to Server ......................................................................................... 106
6.2 Main Window Elements ..................................................................................... 107
6.3 Main Menu .......................................................................................................... 108
6.4 Administration .................................................................................................... 146
6.5 Voice Dispatch .................................................................................................... 284
6.6 Location Tracking ............................................................................................... 318
6.7 Job Ticketing........................................................................................................ 334
6.8 Guard Tour / Route Management .................................................................... 342
6.9 Text Messages .................................................................................................... 353
6.10 Voice Recording .................................................................................................. 357
6.11 Reports ................................................................................................................ 357
6.12 Radio Allocation .................................................................................................. 359
6.13 Beacons ............................................................................................................... 361
7 TRBOnet Web Console .................................................................................................. 367
7.1 Installing Web Console ...................................................................................... 367
7.2 Configuring Web Console.................................................................................. 371
7.3 Using Web Console ............................................................................................ 373
Appendix A: Backing up and Restoring Database and Audio Recordings ...................... 382
Appendix B: SIP Setup for Motorola Phone System .......................................................... 393

ii
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

1 Introduction
1.1 About This Guide and Related Documentation
This document is intended for MOTOTRBO radio network administrators as
well as dispatchers responsible for the TRBOnet dispatch console operations. It
provides guidance on the installation, configuration, and maintenance of the
TRBOnet Server and Dispatch Console applications.

1.2 About TRBOnet

TRBOnet is a suite of professional applications for MOTOTRBO digital two-way
radio networks. TRBOnet manages voice and data communication paths across
network endpoints. It provides a unified graphical dispatcher workbench
interface for the entire range of workforce fleet management tasks.

1.3 Contacts
Region Phone Email & Support

EMEA +44 203 608 0598

[email protected] — general and
commercial inquiries

Americas +1 872 222 8726 [email protected] — technical

support
http://trbonet.com/kb/ — online
knowledge base
APAC +61 28 607 8325

1.3 Contacts 1
 2 Hardware and Software Requirements
TRBOnet Server/Agent with IP connection only

Voice Channels 4 8 16 24 24+

Intel Core Intel Core Intel Core i7, 6 Contact

CPU Intel Core i7, 4 Cores
i5 i5 Cores technical
Memory 2 GB 4 GB 4 GB 8 GB support

HDD 2 GB for installation files, +1 MB per 1 minute of voice recording

Sound Card No

Windows 10/11, Windows Server 2016/2019/2022

Supported OS Note: Windows Server 2016/2019/2022 requires Desktop Experience

Role/Feature installed.

Software .NET Framework 4.8, MS SQL Server 2016 or higher

TRBOnet Server /Agent with Control Stations

Control Stations 1 2+

CPU Intel Core i5

Memory 2 GB

HDD 2 GB for installation files, +1 MB per 1 minute of voice recording

Multi-channel Sound Card required;

Recommended:
Sound Card Integrated sound card can be used. 1. M-Audio Delta 1010 LT
2. Roland OCTA CAPTURE Hi-SPEED USB
Audio Capture

Additional
Devices Cable connector Motorola PMKN4016

Supported OS Windows 10/11

Software .NET Framework 4.8, MS SQL Server 2016 or higher

Dispatch Console

CPU Intel Core i5

Memory 4 GB

HDD 2 GB for installation files

Sound Card Yes

Display 1600x900 minimum resolution, 1920x1080 and higher resolution is recommended

Additional Devices Speakers and microphone, or headset; Imtradex devices are recommended

Supported OS Windows 10/11

Software .NET Framework 4.8

2 2 Hardware and Software Requirements

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

3 System Architecture Overview

3.1 TRBOnet Server, Agent and Console
The TRBOnet software is designed as a client-server architecture,
where TRBOnet Server is PC-based and runs as a Windows service on a
network computer, stores data in an MS SQL database, and allows client
connections from Web Consoles, Dispatch Consoles, and Mobile Clients. The
TRBOnet service can be located on a dedicated remote PC, a local PC (along
with the Dispatch Console), or on a virtual machine.
In addition, remote software agents, such as TRBOnet Agent, and/or hardware
agents, such as TRBOnet Swift A200, can be connected to TRBOnet Server
providing additional voice and data communications paths to and from remote
sites. Such configurations can be used when radio equipment can't be
connected directly to TRBOnet Server due to IP network limitations (see section
3.3, IP Backend Network Requirements).
TRBOnet Dispatch Console is a PC-based voice dispatch and data application
for MOTOTRBO professional digital two-way radio systems.

TRBOnet Server

TRBOnet Agent

Local
Radio Infrastructure
WAN/LAN

Remote
Radio Infrastructure
TRBOnet
Web Console

TRBOnet
Dispatch Console

3.1 TRBOnet Server, Agent and Console 3

 3.2 MOTOTRBO Radio Systems

3.2.1 Single Site conventional system

A Single Site conventional system is a digital conventional two-way MOTOTRBO
system that includes one digital repeater and allows you to transmit voice and
data via two conventional channels. Radio groups and radio units are assigned
to these conventional radio channels.

3.2.2 IP Site Connect

An IP Site Connect (IPSC) system is a digital conventional two-way MOTOTRBO
system that provides two wide-area channels to increase your communications
RF coverage area. It is possible to connect up to 15 repeaters (each
geographical location of a repeater is called a "site") into one system using an
IP connection, which allows increasing the coverage area for voice and data
transmissions. The main objective of an IPSC system is to provide a stable
connection between the radio units and control centers regardless of the
distance.
Site 1 Site 2 Site 3

TRBOnet
Server

Master Repeater 1 Peer Repeater 2 Peer Repeater 3

LAN/WAN

Dispatcher 1 Dispatcher 2 Dispatcher 3

4 3 System Architecture Overview

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

3.2.3 Capacity Plus

Capacity Plus (also known as Capacity Plus Single Site) is a digital trunked two-
way MOTOTRBO system that is designed for high volume communications at a
single site location. The system is designed to provide communications among
a large number of users within a building, a set of buildings, or a single
geographical region. This system type allows you to effortlessly increase the
number of channels for both voice and data transmission between the radio
units and control centers. As this system type is trunked instead of standard
conventional, radio units are always automatically forwarded to a free channel
rather than being programmed to remain on a single slot, thereby
utilizing/sharing the available unused/free RF resources (channels) among
different users. The main objective of Capacity Plus is to support more
simultaneous voice and data transmissions within one capacious system.

Talk Group 1
Dispatcher 1
Master Voice Repeater 1

Voice Repeater 2

Dispatcher 2

LAN/WAN Voice Repeater 3

Talk Group 2
Dispatcher 3 Data Repeater 4

Data Repeater 5

TRBOnet
Server

3.2.4 Linked Capacity Plus (LCP)

Linked Capacity Plus (also known as Capacity Plus Multi Site) is a digital trunked
multisite two-way MOTOTRBO system that enables you to accommodate both
high volume and wide area communications. This system design allows you to
connect via IP up to 15 Linked Capacity Plus sites located in one geographical
region (for example, City of Charlotte) or in larger geographically separated
territories (for example, covering the Florida Keys from Miami to Key West).
This system type allows you to increase the RF coverage area and the number
of channels for voice and data transmission between the radio units and
control centers. The main objective of Linked Capacity Plus is to support more
simultaneous voice and data transmissions regardless of the distance.

3.2 MOTOTRBO Radio Systems 5

 Site 1

Voice Repeater 1 Voice Repeater 2 Data Repeater 3 Data Repeater 4

Dispatcher 1

Router + Switch

Dispatcher 2

LAN/WAN

Router + Switch

Dispatcher 3
Site 2

Router + Switch

TRBOnet
Server
Voice Repeater 5 Voice Repeater 6 Data Repeater 7 Data Repeater 8

Control Control Control

Station 1 Station 2 Station N

3.2.5 Connect Plus

Connect Plus is a digital trunked multisite two-way MOTOTRBO system that
enables you to accommodate high volume, wide area communication that’s
required for your business allowing you to connect via IP multiple sites located
in one geographical region or in larger geographically separated territories.
This system type allows you to increase the RF coverage area and the number
of channels for voice and data transmission between the radio units and
control centers. Radio units are always automatically forwarded to the control
channel. The main objective of Connect Plus is to support more simultaneous
voice and data transmissions regardless of the distance as well as to provide a
more structural addressing of the transmissions provided by XRC controller
and XRT gateway.

6 3 System Architecture Overview

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Dispatcher 1 XRC 9000 XRC 9000

Voice Repeater 1 Voice Repeater 3

Talk Group 1 Talk Group 3

Dispatcher 2 Data Repeater 2 Data Repeater 4

Talk Group 2 Talk Group 4

Dispatcher 3 XRT 9000

Router 1 Router 2

LAN/WAN

TRBOnet
* TRBOnet Server requires connections to only one XRT 9000 Controller and one XRC 9000 Controller in the system
Server*

3.2.6 Capacity Max

Capacity Max is MOTOTRBO's next-generation trunking solution. Built on the
DMR Tier III Mode of Operation, it delivers smooth scalability, low cost of
ownership and reliable operation.

3.2 MOTOTRBO Radio Systems 7

 3.3 IP Backend Network Requirements
Before planning any IP connected MOTOTRBO system, read the MOTOTRBO
System Planner (Back-End Network Considerations).
• Delay/Latency
The amount of time it takes for voice to leave the source repeater and
arrive at the destination repeater. The delay should be less than 60 ms. It
can be up to 90 ms, but requires changes in CPS for both radio units and
repeaters.
• Jitter
The variation of the packet inter-arrival time. It should be less than 60 ms.
• Packet Loss
In the case of voice, the ongoing call ends if six consecutive packets do
not arrive within 60 ms of their expected arrival time. In the case of data,
the repeater waits for the expected number of packets (as per the data
header) before ending the call.
• Bandwidth
Refer to the MOTOTRBO System Planner for bandwidth calculations, but
roughly, it requires 96 kbps for each repeater connection and should be
summed up for all repeaters.
If the IP backend network does not satisfy MOTOTRBO requirements, it will
degrade audio quality significantly, including dropped voice calls.

3.3.1 Linked Capacity Plus Specific Requirements

• Addresses and Ports
A static IP Address and UDP Port for the master repeater must be made
available to all peer devices on the Linked Capacity Plus system.
 When a peer device registers with the master repeater, the network
supplies the return IP address and UDP port of the peer device to the
master repeater. The IP address and UDP port must then be made
available to all other MOTOTRBO™ LCP devices on the system.

8 3 System Architecture Overview

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

4 TRBOnet PLUS and Dependencies Installation

TRBOnet runs on Microsoft Windows-based PCs. For the TRBOnet PLUS
Compatibility Table, see
https://trbonet.com/kb/trbonet-enterprise-plus-compatibility-table/

4.1 Installing Microsoft SQL Server

Download and install Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 or higher.
You can download and install either a full-featured MS SQL Server or an
Express edition of MS SQL Server. The Express edition of MS SQL Server is free;
however, it has some technical restrictions (maximum database size of 10 GB,
RAM usage, and other restrictions).
For example, Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 SP2 - Express Edition (which is free)
is available at:
http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=30438

Note: We recommend that you download a version of SQL Server

with Tools.

Select the 32-bit or 64-bit version depending on the underlying OS. Accept the
defaults for the setup.
See also section 5.2.1.1, Windows Authentication on page 15.

4.2 Installing .NET Components

Windows 8 and later, as well as Windows Server 2012 and later, include the
required .NET 4.6 components as part of the operating system.
The .NET Framework redistributables are available from Microsoft at:
https://www.microsoft.com/en-
us/download/search.aspx?q=.net%20framework

4.3 Installing TRBOnet PLUS

• Contact Neocom Software to obtain the latest installation package of the
TRBOnet PLUS software, unzip, and run the setup file as a local
administrator.
• When the TRBOnet PLUS Setup wizard appears, click Next.
• On the End User License Agreement page, accept the terms of the
license, and then click Next.

4.3 Installing TRBOnet PLUS 9

 • On the Choose Setup Type page, click one of the following options:
 TRBOnet Dispatch Console
Choose this option to install only TRBOnet Dispatch Console on your
computer.
 TRBOnet Server and Dispatch Console
Choose this option to install both TRBOnet Server and
TRBOnet Dispatch Console at once on your computer.
 Custom
Choose this option to select from the list one or more components to
be installed.

For example, you may install only TRBOnet Server Instance:

• Accept the defaults for the rest of the setup and complete the installation.

10 4 TRBOnet PLUS and Dependencies Installation

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

5 TRBOnet Server
To start TRBOnet Server, click the corresponding shortcut on the desktop,
or click Start > All Programs > Neocom Software > TRBOnet Server x.x

5.1 License Information

The TRBOnet software requires a valid license in order to operate. Depending
on the License Type (see next section), the license can be obtained via
TRBOnet's website or from a Neocom representative.

5.1.1 License Types

There are three license types available for TRBOnet PLUS:
License
Demo Trial Commercial
Type

Validity 60 days By Request Permanent (non-expiring)

Quantity of
Up to 2 control stations
Control
or 1 IP repeater
Stations By Request According to Customer order
connection
and Radio
10 Radio Units
Units

Features Limited functionality By Request According to Customer order

Assigned to server’s Hardware

Assigned to server’s
ID.
Hardware ID.
Assigned to the serial numbers
For more details on
of master repeaters and control
How to It can be downloaded Hardware ID, see
stations. To retrieve serial
obtain from the web page. the article at
numbers, use Control Station's
https://trbonet.com/k
codeplug (do not rely on a serial
b/how-to-get-the-
number printed on the device’s
hardware-id/.
label).

For more information on the license and renewals, contact our technical support at
[email protected]
To see how the Hardware ID and control stations and/or repeaters are
assigned in your license, open the INFO file delivered with the license file (for
example, in Notepad):

5.1 License Information 11

 1. Your license is assigned to the Hardware ID.
2. Your license is assigned to the serial numbers of master repeaters and
control stations.

5.1.2 Moving TRBOnet Server to a Different Server PC

If there is a need to use TRBOnet Server on a different server PC, please contact
your Neocom sales representative for further instructions.

5.1.3 Using Spare Repeaters

If the plan is to use spare repeaters, for example, as replacement for damaged
ones, communicate the total number of repeaters when ordering a license.
For example, 3 repeaters will be actively used with TRBOnet Server and 1 spare
repeater. Communicate the following repeaters limitation: 3 active 1 spare and
provide the serial numbers of all 4 repeaters when placing an order (also
include the spare repeater’s serial number).

5.1.4 License Manager

• In the Configuration pane on the left, select License.
In the right pane, you can see the text of your current license.

12 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

To apply the new license:

1. Click the License Manager link in the right pane.
The License Manager wizard appears.
2. Click Next.
3. Click the ellipsis (…) button on the right-hand side of the License file box.
The Open dialog box appears.
4. Locate the license file you received from our technical support and click
Open.
The full path of the license file appears in the License file box.
5. Click Next.
6. Click Finish to close the wizard.
7. Click Apply and then confirm to restart TRBOnet Server.
Note: To use a single license for multiple TRBOnet software
instances, you need TRBOnet License Server. For
detailed instructions on how to use TRBOnet License
Server, refer to TRBOnet License Server Configuration
Guide.

5.1 License Information 13

 5.2 TRBOnet Server Database
• In the Configuration pane, select Database.

• In the Database pane, specify the following database-related settings:

 SQL Server
Enter the location of the Microsoft SQL Server name and instance. For
example, in the screenshot above, the default instance name of
Microsoft SQL Server Express installed on the local computer is shown.
 Database
Enter the name of the TRBOnet database.
 Authentication
Select the authentication method for the TRBOnet database. The
default method is Windows Authentication. See also section 5.2.1,
Database Authentication Methods (page 15).
 Login and Password
Enter a valid SQL Server login and password if the SQL Server
Authentication is selected for the database.
 Specify the path for database archives
Select this option, and in the corresponding Path box enter the full
path of the custom folder for database backups. Or, click the ellipsis
(…) button and in the Browse For Folder dialog box locate the
appropriate path.
 Use custom folder for audio files
Select this option, and in the corresponding Path box enter the full
path of the custom folder for audio recordings of the voice
calls/sessions. Or, click the ellipsis (…) button.

14 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Path to Audio Files dialog box, select the Root Folder, and in
the File Path Template box enter the information (by clicking the
appropriate links below: Year, Month, Day, etc.) that will be used to
generate the file/path name.
Note: If you don't specify folder paths for the database
archives and audio files, TRBOnet Server will use the
following default paths:
%ProgramData%\Neocom Software\TRBOnet PLUS\Backups -
for database archives.
%ProgramData%\Neocom Software\TRBOnet PLUS\Audio - for
audio.
Also note that older backups are not deleted
automatically. It is recommended that you regularly
delete the files you no longer need to avoid running out
of storage space.

 Use custom folder to store file attachments

Select this option, and in the corresponding Path box enter the full
path of the custom folder where text message attachments will be
stored. Or, click the ellipsis (…) button and in the Browse For Folder
dialog box locate the appropriate path.
• When you finish configuring the required database parameters, click
Create Database.
• After you create or upgrade a database, click Apply and then confirm to
restart TRBOnet Server.

5.2.1 Database Authentication Methods

5.2.1.1 Windows Authentication
• From the Authentication drop-down list, select Windows.

5.2 TRBOnet Server Database 15

 To provide access permissions for TRBOnet Server to connect to MS SQL Server,
create an account with sysadmin privileges.
During the installation process, MS SQL Server 2008 automatically grants
sysadmin privileges to the NT Authority\SYSTEM account.
In the case of MS SQL Server 2012 and higher versions, add the
NT Authority\SYSTEM account to the Administrators group during the
installation process. If the database owner privileges are required to work with
TRBOnet Database, you need to assign the sysadmin role to the Local System
account.
5.2.1.2 SQL Server Authentication
• From the Authentication drop-down list, select SQL Server.

To connect to SQL Server using SQL Server Authentication, create an SQL

login with sysadmin privileges in the SQL Server in use. For detailed
instructions on how to create an SQL login, see
http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa337562.aspx

16 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

5.3 TRBOnet Server Service

• In the Configuration pane, select Service.

• In the Service pane, specify the following service-related parameters:

 Choose the required logon type:
Logon as Local System
Choose this option to use an account with local system administrator
privileges to run the service as a Windows service (Recommended);
Logon as User
Choose this option to use a different account to run the service as a
Windows service. This account must allow the user to run services in
Windows, have read and write access to the Neocom Software folder
and subfolders in the "%ProgramFiles%" (or,
"%ProgramFiles(x86)%" for 64-bit OS) and "%ProgramData%"
folders. For example, using such an account may be required in the
following cases:
1. An Active Directory domain network is used, and the current
Windows user is not allowed to use a Local System account to
launch services on the local PC due to domain policy restrictions.
2. MS SQL Server is installed on a remote PC, and Windows
Authentication (see section 5.2.1.1, page 15) has been selected to
connect to the database.
 Click Install Service.
 Click the Start Service link that appears in the right pane.

5.4 Network Parameters

• In the Configuration pane, select Network.

5.4 Network Parameters 17

 • In the Network pane, specify the following network-related parameters:
 Network interface
From the drop-down list, select the network interface that will be used
to communicate between the Server and Dispatch Consoles. Click to
refresh the list of network interfaces available on your PC.
Note: If both TRBOnet Server and Dispatch Console are
installed on the same PC, then select 127.0.0.1
(Loopback Pseudo-Interface).

 Command port
Enter the port number to be used by a Dispatch Console to connect to
the Server (4021, by default).
 First VoIP port
Enter the number of the first VoIP port for audio communications
between the Server and Dispatch Consoles (4022, by default). Each
additional Dispatch Console will establish a connection on the next
available port number.
 VoIP protocol
From the drop-down list, select the VoIP protocol type for
communications between the Server and Dispatch Consoles:
• All - UDP will be used first; if unavailable, TCP will be used;
• TCP - slower but more reliable (set by default);
• UDP - faster but data packets can be lost; some routers may drop
UDP packets.
 Data protocol
From the drop-down list, select the protocol to exchange data other
than voice between the Server and Dispatch Consoles (TCP, by default).

18 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Use broadcast mode for audio

Selecting this option will help to optimize network load and minimize
transmission delays. The "load" on the network will be reduced as the
Server will utilize a single audio transmission to a group of Dispatch
Consoles instead of sending multiple audio streams to each individual
Dispatch Console. This method of transmission will also minimize the
transmission delays if there's a large number of Dispatch Consoles or
the Server is busy processing other features.
Note: When the broadcast mode is set, a Dispatch Console
cannot run on the same machine as TRBOnet Server,
and a warning message will appear when you select this
option.

• Broadcast port
Enter the port number to be used to broadcast audio (5000, by
default).
 Use proxy server
Select this option to enable an alternative proxy server for TRBOnet
Dispatch Software to access Internet.
• Click the Configure link to specify the alternative server settings:

• Use an alternative server

Select this option to enable an alternative proxy server.
 Address
Enter the proxy server IP address.
 Port
Enter the proxy server port number.
• Use authentication
Select this option to use authentication to connect to the alternative
proxy server.
 Login
Enter the login for the authentication, if needed.
 Password
Enter the password for the authentication, if needed.

5.4 Network Parameters 19

 • After you configure the proxy server settings, click OK.
 Encrypt data over network
Select this option to guarantee the security of data transfer between
TRBOnet Server and Dispatch Console, and/or TRBOnet Agent. It is
recommended that this option be used when a connection between
system components is established via the Internet or other public
networks.

5.5 Reports
Perform the following steps to select the option to save scheduled reports and
enter the appropriate information.

Note: The selection of the type of scheduled reports is

configured in the Dispatch Console (see section 6.4.5.15,
Scheduled Report)

• In the Configuration pane, select Reports.

• In the Reports pane, select the Save scheduled reports check box and
specify the following parameters:
 Path
Click the ellipsis (…) button and locate the folder on the PC where you
wish to save reports generated by the TRBOnet software.
 Format
From the drop-down list, select the format for the reports (PDF or
Excel).
 Logo
Click the Select button, and in the 'Open' dialog box, navigate to the
desired logo file (.BMP, .PNG, .JPG, etc.) and click 'Open'.
To revert to the default logo file, click the Default button.

20 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

5.6 Backup Configuration

TRBOnet Server supports a redundant (secondary/backup) configuration which
allows automatic switching from the primary to the redundant
(secondary/backup) server in case of failure of the primary server. Dispatch
Console operation will not be interrupted.
• In the Configuration pane, select Redundancy.

• In the Redundancy pane, select this option to enable the

Redundant server mode option.
• Redundancy Mode
Select a mode for the redundant server (Active or Passive) from the
drop-down list.
• To add a main server, click Add.

• IP Address
Type the IP address of the main server.
• Port
Enter the same port number as specified for the Command port.

5.7 Service Management

The Service Management pane allows you to specify various parameters for the
Presence, Location, and Indoor services.
• In the Configuration pane, select Service Management.

5.7 Service Management 21

 • In the Service Management pane, specify the following service-related
parameters:

5.7.1 Presence Service

The Presence service group includes the following registration-related
parameters:
• Auto request presence timeout
Enter the time interval that will be used by the server to regularly check
the online subscriber radios if there has been no activity. The server
considers a radio to be inactive (or, offline) if the radio does not send any
GPS, Text, ARS, or Voice messages.
If you do not have a dedicated channel for data revert, use the following
table:
Number of Presence timeout Number of Presence timeout
radio units (minutes) radio units (minutes)

up to 10 5 30 to 40 17

10 to 20 9 40 to 50 21

20 to 30 13 over 50 120
If there is a dedicated data revert channel in the system, you may set this
parameter to a somewhat lower value than indicated in the table.
Note: If the DDMS service is enabled, set the value of this
parameter to the value of the DeviceRefreshTime
parameter in MOTOTRBO DDMS.

• ARS refresh interval

Enter the value of the parameter that determines how often a radio unit
will send ARS packets. It is recommended that a value of 30 minutes be
used for this interval. This value may be changed depending on the
system load.

22 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Notes: For all radio systems (except for Connect PLUS and
Capacity MAX), the ARS service must be enabled on the
subscriber radio channels (MOTOTRBO CPS,
Channels>Channel>ARS).

If the DDMS service is enabled, set the value of this

parameter to the value of the PersistenceTO
parameter in MOTOTRBO DDMS.

• Ignore unregistered Radios

Select this option so that unregistered radio units will be ignored and
thus won't appear in Dispatch Console.

5.7.2 Location Service

The Location Service group includes the following location-related
parameters:
• GPS restart by inactivity timeout
Enter the time interval that will be used by the server to send the GPS
Start Trigger request to the online subscriber radio if there has been no
GPS activity.
• Dispatch Console update interval
Enter the time interval that will be used to send GPS data packages from
the Server to Dispatch Consoles. The lower the value, the more data
traffic will be present on the network. Adjust this value based on the
network bandwidth. The lower the bandwidth, the higher the update
interval.
• Automatic error correction
Select this option to enable automatic error correction to detect and
correct invalid GPS data.
Click the Configure link to specify the GPS parameters to be corrected:

5.7 Service Management 23

 Discard GPS data if
 Speed greater than
Select this option and enter the maximum possible speed of your
vehicles. As a result, the coordinates with speeds that exceed the
maximum limit will be discarded.
 Location accuracy worse than
Select this option and enter the largest distance for the accuracy of the
GPS receiver. As a result, the coordinates with distances that exceed
the maximum limit will be discarded.
 GPS time error greater than
Select this option and enter the largest allowable time error, in
minutes. As a result, the coordinates with time errors that exceed the
maximum limit will be discarded.
 Coordinates have duplicates
Select this option to remove duplicate coordinates from the GPS data.
 Set speed to 0 if it is less than
Select this option and enter the low-speed threshold. Speeds below
this threshold will be considered as zero by the server.
• Send the latest GPS data to dispatchers on alert
Select this option so that dispatchers receive the latest GPS data when an
alert occurs. Then choose one of the following options:
 For the last X minutes
Choose this option and enter the time, in minutes, to be used as the
last time period for the latest GPS data.
 GPS points
Choose this option and enter the number of GPS points to be used for
the latest GPS data.

5.7.3 Indoor Service

The Indoor Service group includes the following indoor-related parameters:
• Remove offline radio from beacon
Select this option so that an offline radio is not shown on its associated
beacon.
• Ignore beacon position on alarm if GPS is fixed (only K-TERM)
Select this option so that beacon positioning is ignored in case of alarm
when a radio transmits valid GPS data.
Note: This feature relates only to K-TERM beacons.

5.8 Advanced Settings

• In the Configuration pane, select Advanced Settings.

24 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Advanced Settings pane, specify the following advanced

parameters:
 Language
From the drop-down list, select the interface language for TRBOnet
Server.
 Logging level
From the drop-down list, select the logging level that determines the
granularity of log messages in the System Log. The choices are: None,
Low, Normal, and High.
Note: This information is used by technical support for
troubleshooting purposes, so it is recommended that
this value be kept unchanged (Normal).

 Administrator Account
From the drop-down list, select either Enabled or Disabled. If you select
Disabled, the administrator won't be able to log in to the Dispatch
Console.
• Reset password
Click this link to reset the administrator password to the default
value.
 Audio Recording format
From the drop-down list, select the format to be used to store audio
recordings. The available formats are WAV, TNA, and OGG.
Note: The TNA format is a proprietary audio format that
contains additional information about radio calls, such
as radio ID, start time, end time, and other parameters.
This format provides more details about call
participants and allows easy navigation within recorded
audio files.

5.8 Advanced Settings 25

  Audio Recording codec
From the drop-down list, select the audio codec to be used to
compress the audio files.
 Voice of Text to Speech
From the drop-down list, select the voice that will be used for Text-to-
Speech messages.
 Measurement system
From the drop-down list, select either Metric or US units.
 Latitude/Longitude format
From the drop-down list, select the format of Latitude/Longitude pairs.
 TX Passive timeout
Enter the time that text and voice messages will be stored and later
sent when the channel becomes available (no longer busy).
"Unlimited" is recommended.
 Voice Mail timeout
Enter the time duration where TRBOnet Server will continue to try to
send Voice Mail messages to a recipient. "Unlimited" is recommended.
• Number of messages
Enter the maximum number of Voice Mail messages that will be
stored in the queue before being sent.
 Text Message Passive timeout
Enter the time duration where the TRBOnet Server will continue to try
to send Text messages to a recipient. "Unlimited" is recommended.
• Number of messages
Enter the maximum number of text messages that will be stored in
the queue before being sent.

5.8.1 Geocoding Servers

Geocoding servers resolve GPS coordinates to street addresses for reporting
purposes and other needs, for example, 'GPS activity for period' reports. Online
geocoding services, such as Google or Nominatim, can be used and are the
standard default services in TRBOnet. However, their use may be limited by the
number of requests. Furthermore, you can add custom geocoding servers to
the system.
You can configure geocoding servers in three ways depending on whether the
Server and/or Dispatch Console have Internet access and on your local
geocoding server settings:
1. The Dispatch Console has Internet access and the Server has no Internet
access. The Server can connect to preconfigured (Google and
Nominatim) and/or local corporate geocoding servers via the Dispatch
Console.

26 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

2. The Server has Internet access and Dispatch Console has no Internet
access. The Dispatch Console can connect to preconfigured (Google and
Nominatim) and/or local corporate geocoding servers via the Server
(follow the instructions below).
3. You have your own Geocoding server in the local network. In this case,
you can configure data resolving in both the Server and the Dispatch
Console.

5.8.1.1 Configuring Geocoding Servers

• In the Configuration pane, select Geocoding Servers.

• In the Geocoding Servers pane, specify the following geocoding-related

parameters:
 Google and Nominatim
These are pre-configured geocoding servers, which allow resolving
GPS coordinates to street addresses and street addresses to GPS
coordinates.
Note: These geocoding servers can't be deleted from the
system.

 Click Add to add a geocoding server to the system.

5.8 Advanced Settings 27

 • Server Name
Enter the name of your geocoding server.
• Get address by coordinates
Select this option to resolve GPS coordinates to street addresses.
In the box below, enter the server address with the appropriate
parameters.
Note: Keep in mind that the {lat} and {lon} variables are
mandatory to allow TRBOnet Dispatch Console to
retrieve GPS coordinates from the radio unit.

Click Test to check the connection to the geocoding server. Enter a

pair of GPS coordinates and see if the resolved street address
appears.
• Get coordinates by address
Select this option to resolve street addresses to GPS coordinates (for
example, for the Search by Address feature).
In the box below, enter the server address with the appropriate
parameters.
Note: Keep in mind that the {address} variable is mandatory
to allow TRBOnet Dispatch Console to search map
objects by address.

Click Test to check the connection to the geocoding server. Enter an

address and see if you get the list of map objects corresponding to
the address entered.
 Use the Up ( ) and Down ( ) buttons to move the selected
geocoding server up and down in the priority list of geocoding servers.
When requesting GPS data via the geocoding servers configured in
TRBOnet Server, GPS data is requested from the geocoding servers
according to the priority level. The geocoding server at the top of the
list has the highest priority level. In case the first geocoding server is
unavailable, data will be requested from the second geocoding server
in the list, and so forth down the list of geocoding servers.
The administrator must ensure that the geocoding servers in the list
are able to resolve GPS data.
 Request a place name upon receiving GPS coordinates
Select this option to resolve GPS coordinates to street addresses
immediately by a GPS event. Note that street addresses and GPS
coordinates are automatically (without user intervention) stored in the
TRBOnet database to optimize the response time for street address
requests (for example, GPS reports) and to reduce geocoding server
load. These street addresses and GPS coordinates will be stored
without user intervention whenever GPS are resolved to street
addresses via a request to a Geocoding Server.

28 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

5.9 Radio Systems

By enabling the Radio Systems feature, the TRBOnet Server is able to be
connected to a radio system. Otherwise, you should use Remote agents (see
section 5.12, Remote Agents).
• In the Configuration pane, select Radio Systems.
• In the Radio Systems pane, select or make sure that the Enable Radio
Systems option is selected.

• In the Radio Systems pane, specify the following parameters:

 CAI Network
The CAI (Common Air Interface) Network is a value that is combined
with the Radio ID to produce the individual radio's air interface
network IP address. All radios must use the same CAI Network ID to be
able to exchange data. It is recommended that the default value of 12
is used.
 CAI Group Network
The CAI Group Network is a value that is combined with the Group ID
to produce the group's air interface network IP address. The CAI
Group Network ID forms the first or most significant byte of each
group's network IP address. All radios must use the same CAI Group
Network ID to be able to exchange data (225, by default).
Note: The values of these two parameters must match those
configured for the radio units via the MOTOTRBO CPS.

5.9 Radio Systems 29

 All radio systems based on MOTOTRBO services are represented in the
Registered Radio Systems table, including their Name, IP Address, and Radio
ID (1):
• To add a radio system, click Add and select the appropriate system type
from the drop-down menu (2).

5.9.1 Services
• In the Configuration pane, under Radio Systems, select Services:
• In the Services pane, specify the following Radio System Services-related
parameters:
 Automatic Registration Service (ARS)
Select this option to enable the ARS service for the radios. When the
radio powers up, it automatically registers with the server. This feature
is used with data applications, that is, any data traffic on this channel is
associated with an application server such as MOTOTRBO Text
Messaging or MOTOTRBO Location Services.
• Port
Enter the local port number for the ARS service (4005, by default).
 Telemetry service (TLM)
Select this option to enable the Telemetry service, which is the wireless
transmission and reception of measured quantities for remotely
monitoring environmental conditions or equipment parameters.

30 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Port
Enter the local port number for the Telemetry service (4008, by
default).
 Text Messaging service (TMS)
Select this option to enable the Text Messaging service (Motorola
Solutions proprietary) which is used to exchange text messages
between the radios and the dispatchers.
• Port
Enter the local port number for the Text Messaging service (4007, by
default).
 Location service (LRRP / Indoor)
Select this option to enable the Location service. The radio can send its
coordinates when it is in Global Positioning (via LRRP Protocol) or
iBeacon coverage area.
• Port
This is the local port number for the Location service (4001), which
cannot be modified.
 Location service (LIP / Indoor)
Select this option to enable the Location service. The radio can send its
coordinates when it is in Global Positioning (via LIP Protocol) or
iBeacon coverage area.
• Port
This is the local port number for the Location service (5017, by
default).
 Job Ticketing service (JTS)
Select this option to enable the Job Ticketing service.
• Port
This is the local port number for the Job Ticketing service (4013, by
default).
 Text Messaging service DMR
Select this option to enable the DMR-based Text Messaging service.
• Port
Enter the local port number for the DMR-based Text Messaging
service (5016, by default).
 Indoor service (K-TERM)
Select this option to enable the Indoor Location service.
• Port
Enter the local port number for the Indoor service (3022, by default).
 Indoor LAN Service (K-TERM)
Select this option to enable the Indoor LAN service.

5.9 Radio Systems 31

 • Port
Enter the local port number for the Indoor LAN service (3001, by
default).
 Tallysman Sprite service
Select this option to enable the service for autonomous event and
aggregated event reporting to provide significant reduction in GPS
data overhead.
• Port
Enter the local port number for the Tallysman Sprite service (4004,
by default).
 FS 5000 location service (GPS)
Select this option to enable the FS 5000 location service, which is a
service for transmitting GPS data packages. This service uses FS 5000
Option Board.
• Port
Enter the local port number for the FS 5000 location service (4004,
by default).
 Swift.Tracker v.1 service
Select this option to enable the service to transmit coordinates and
data packages via a radio channel using the Swift.Tracker TR001 device.
• Port
Enter the local port number for the Swift.Tracker v.1 service (4004,
by default).
 Swift.Tracker v.1 service (IP channel)
Select this option to enable the service to transmit coordinates and
data packages via a radio channel and a reserved IP channel using the
Swift.Tracker TR001 device.
• Port
Enter the local port number for the Swift.Tracker v.1 service with an
IP channel (4080, by default).
 Swift.Tracker v.2 service
Select this option to enable the service to transmit coordinates and
data packages via a radio channel using the Swift.Tracker TR001 device
(version 2).
• Port
Enter the local port number for the Swift.Tracker v.2 service (4104,
by default).
 Swift.Tracker v.2 service (IP channel)
Select this option to enable the service to transmit coordinates and
data packages via a radio channel and a reserved IP channel using the
Swift.Tracker TR001 device (version 2).

32 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Port
Enter the local port number for the Swift.Tracker v.2 service with an
IP channel (4180, by default).
 Extended Text Messaging service
Select this option to enable the Extended Text Messaging service to
include sending detailed preconfigured templates with the help of
TRBOnet Dispatch Software.
• Port
Enter the local port number for the Extended Text Messaging
service (4010, by default).
 Extended Data service
Select this option to enable the Extended Data service that will be used
for communication with TRBOnet Communicator.
• Port
Enter the local port number for the Extended Data service (4106, by
default).
 Telemetry service Novox
Select this option to enable the Telemetry service based on NOVOX
devices.
• Requests port
Enter the local port number to listen for requests (8090, by default).
• Events port
Enter the local port number to listen for events (8091, by default).
 G4S RS232 service
Select this option to enable the custom developed G4S RS232 service.
• Port
Enter the local port number for the G4S RS232 service (4004, by
default).
 Zebra printer service
Select this option to enable the service for printing Job Tickets. A Zebra
printer is connected to a radio via Bluetooth. The radios should be
Bluetooth-enabled.
• Port
Enter the local port number for Zebra printer service (4072, by
default).
 Forward Data service
Select this option to enable the Forward Data service. This feature is
used to forward "raw data" via the COM port from one device to
another.
• Port
Enter the local port number for Forward Data service (4011, by
default).

5.9 Radio Systems 33

 5.9.2 Adding a MOTOTRBO Repeater
• In the Radio Systems pane, click Add.
Or, in the Configuration pane, right-click Radio Systems.
• In the drop-down menu, click Add MOTOTRBO System.
• In the Repeater pane, specify the connection parameters.
To ensure your connection parameters match the actual configuration of
your radio network, you may need to use Motorola CPS or Config Advisor
tools to determine the values. Contact your radio network administrator,
if you do not have this information.

 System Name
Enter a name for the repeater. This name will be displayed in the
Dispatch Console.
 TRBOnet Peer ID
Enter a Peer ID for TRBOnet Server. The Peer ID must be unique
among the repeaters in the radio system.
Note: Motorola recommends that this value be less than 200.

 TRBOnet Radio ID
Enter the Radio ID, which is a gateway for voice and data. The Radio ID
must be unique in the radio system (for Capacity Plus and Linked
Capacity Plus systems, the maximum value is 65535).
 TRBOnet Local Port
Enter the local port number that will be used by TRBOnet Server to
establish a connection to the repeater. Use unique port numbers for
each repeater connection if there are several repeaters connected.
 Master IP Address
Enter the Ethernet IP address of the master repeater.

34 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Note: This value is programmed for a repeater via

MOTOTRBO CPS, in Link Establishment>Master IP.

 Master UDP Port

Enter the UDP port number of the master repeater.
Note: This value is programmed for a repeater via
MOTOTRBO CPS, in Link Establishment>Master UDP Port.

 Authentication Key
Enter the repeater's authentication key (if any).
Note: This value is programmed for a repeater via
MOTOTRBO CPS, in
Link Establishment>Authentication Key.

 System Type
From the drop-down list, select the type of the radio system
('IP Site Connect', 'Capacity Plus', 'Linked Capacity Plus', or
'Extended Range Direct Mode').
 Test
Click this button to check the connection to your master repeater. If
the test is successful, you'll see the information on the repeater you
are connected to, such as the serial number, firmware version, and
other relevant information.
 System Identifier
Enter the system identifier if a Capacity Plus/Linked Capacity Plus or
Capacity MAX system is used with one or more control stations. Use
the same system identifier as you have specified for the corresponding
control stations.
 Use NAI Voice
Select this option to connect to the repeater via NAI (Network
Application Interface) for Voice transfer.
 Use NAI Data (MNIS and DDMS)
Select this option to connect to the repeater via NAI (Network
Application Interface) for Data transfer.
• MNIS
MOTOTRBO Network Interface Service is a Windows application
which acts as a data gateway between the data applications and the
radio system. Data messages are routed through the MNIS.
• DDMS
Device Discovery and Mobility Service is a service for tracking the
presence of radio subscribers in the radio network and transmitting
the data to the server.

5.9 Radio Systems 35

 5.9.2.1 Advanced Settings
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Repeater, select
Advanced settings.

• In the Advanced Settings pane, specify the following repeater-related

advanced settings:
Voice Call Hang Time (ms):
 Group Call
This value sets the duration the repeater reserves the channel after the
end of a group call transmission. During this time, only members of
the group that the channel is reserved for can transmit.
 Private Call
This value sets the duration a radio keeps the private call setup after a
user releases the PTT button. This is to avoid setting up the call again
each time a user presses the PTT button to transmit. During this time,
other radios can still transmit since the channel is essentially idle. After
the hang timer expires, the radio transmits using the TX Contact Name
parameter specified for this channel in MOTOTRBO CPS.
 Emergency Call
This value sets the duration the repeater reserves the channel after the
end of an emergency call transmission. During this time, only
members of the Group that the channel is reserved for can transmit.
Note: The values of the above three parameters must be
taken from the corresponding parameter values
programmed for the repeater via MOTOTRBO CPS in
General Settings.

36 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 TX Preamble
Enter the value of the TX Preamble. The TX Preamble is a string of bits
added in front of a data or control message (Text Messaging, Location
Messaging, Registration, Radio Check, Private Call, and other message
types) before transmission. The acceptable range is 0 - 8640 ms. The
recommended value is 120 ms.
 TX Timeout
Enter the time, in seconds, to be used as a voice session limit. When
the dispatcher starts any voice session in the Dispatch Console,
transmission will be interrupted after this TX Timeout expires.
 Phone system
From the drop-down list, select the system for phone calls:
• Motorola Phone System
This system uses a special call type with the parameters specified for
a radio unit in MOTOTRBO CPS. The Motorola Phone System is
recommended for IP Site Connect mode to minimize Radio response
time. For more details on programming Motorola Radios, see
Appendix B: SIP Setup for Motorola Phone System (page 393).
• TRBOnet Phone System (TX Interrupt)
This is a phone call system based on the private call type using TX
Interrupt feature. This phone system is available for radio systems
with control stations.
 TX Interrupt Mode
Use the default value MSI Proprietary.
The 'DMR Standard' mode is selected when non-Motorola radios are
used that support TX Interrupt and require to be additionally
configured.
 Allow CSBK Data
Select this option so that GPS data is sent in a single CSBK.
Note: This feature is available only when the MNIS Data
Service is enabled for the repeater.

5.9.2.2 Privacy
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Repeater, select
Privacy.

5.9 Radio Systems 37

 • In the Privacy pane, specify the following privacy-related settings:
 Privacy Type
From the drop-down list, select one of the privacy types: None, Basic,
or Enhanced.
 Basic Privacy Key ID
Enter the Privacy Key ID available for the Basic privacy type.
 Enhanced Privacy Keys
Here you add enhanced privacy keys when the Enhanced privacy type
is selected.
• Click Add and specify the required Algorithm, ID, Name, and Value
for the privacy key being added.
 Algorithm
From the drop-down list, select one of the enhanced algorithms if
you are going to use additional encryption.

5.9.2.3 DDMS Service

The DDMS, or Device Discovery and Mobility Service is a service for tracking the
presence of radio subscribers in the radio network and transmitting the data to
the server.
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Repeater, select
DDMS service.

38 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the DDMS service pane, specify the following DDMS service-related

settings:
 Use DDMS service
Select this option to enable the DDMS service for the server.
 Local Port
Enter the number of the local port to be used on a PC with TRBOnet
Dispatch Software for DDMS service.
 Service IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the PC with the DDMS service installed and
running.
 Service port
Enter the service port number.
Note: This value is programmed for a DDMS service via
MOTOTRBO DDMS Administrative Client, in
Interfaces>Watcher Settings>PortWatcher.

 Authentication Port
Enter the authentication server port number.
Note: This value is programmed for a DDMS service via
MOTOTRBO DDMS Administrative Client, in
Interfaces>Authentication Server Settings>
AuthenticationServerPort.

 Redundant services
Here you see the list of redundant DDMS services for failover
purposes.
• Click Add and specify the required parameters for the DDMS service
being added.
• Click Test to test if the selected DDMS service is available.

5.9 Radio Systems 39

 • Use the Up ( ) and Down ( ) buttons to move a selected DDMS
service up and down in the priority list of DDMS services.
Advanced Settings
• In the Configuration pane, under DDMS service, select Advanced
Settings.

• In the Advanced settings pane, you can specify settings that relate to the
connected DDMS service:
 Radio ID list
Enter a list of the radios to receive data from according to the following
rules:
• To receive data from all radios in the system, leave this box blank.
• To receive data from multiple radios and also from a range of
radios, separate each Radio ID by a comma and also enter the
range. For example: 12, 35, 105-111, 249.
Note: In the Radio ID list, enter Radio IDs only, without
mentioning Radio Names and/or the word "Radio".

 Events
In the drop-down list, select the events to be monitored.
 Specify external sites
This is the list of sites that is used when the corresponding system has
a MOTOROLA System Bridge to the current Capacity MAX system.
• Click the Add button and add a site by specifying its Site ID and
selecting the appropriate data types (Presence, Voice, and/or
Data).

40 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

5.9.2.4 MNIS Data Service

The MNIS, or Motorola Network Interface Service, is a Windows application
which acts as a data gateway between the data applications and the radio
system. Data messages are routed through the MNIS.
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Repeater, select
MNIS data service.

• In the MNIS data service pane, specify the following MNIS data service-
related settings:
 Use Data Gateway
Select this option to enable the MNIS data service for the server.
 Service is on a local host
Select this option if the MNIS data service will be used on the local PC.
 IP Address
Enter the IP Address used by the MNIS to communicate with the PC.
Note: This value is programmed for a MNIS data service via
MOTOTRBO MNIS Configuration Utility, and can be
retrieved from
General>Tunnel Network>Tunnel IP Address.

 Control port
Select this option and enter the number for the MNIS control port.
Note: This value is programmed for a MNIS data service via
MOTOTRBO MNIS Configuration Utility, in
Advanced>Network>MNIS Control Interface TCP Port.

 MNIS Service
Select this option, and from the drop-down list select the available
MNIS service.

5.9 Radio Systems 41

  Redundant services
Here you see the list of redundant MNIS data services for failover
purposes.
• Click Add and specify the required parameters for the MNIS data
service being added.
• Click Test to test if the selected MNIS data service is available.
• Use the Up ( ) and Down ( ) buttons to move a selected MNIS
data service up and down in the priority list of MNIS data services.
Advanced Settings
• In the Configuration pane, under MNIS data service, select
Advanced Settings.

• In the Advanced settings pane, you can specify settings that relate to the
remote MNIS data service:
 Send data over control port
Select this option so that data will be sent via the specified control port.
Or, do not select this option, and instead select one or both of the
following two options:
 Add network routes to the local Windows routing table
Select this option to allow TRBOnet Server to add network routes to the
local Windows routing table so that data can be sent to the remote
MNIS data service.
 Add port forwarding rules to the remote MNIS service
Select this option to allow TRBOnet Server to add forwarding rules to
the remote MNIS data service.
 Radio Range
Specify the range of radios to be monitored by the MNIS service.

42 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

5.9.2.5 Slots
Note: The slots are available only when IP Site Connect is selected in
the Repeater pane.

• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Repeater, select

Slot #1 or Slot #2.

• In the Slot pane, specify the following slot-related parameters:

 Slot #1 (or Slot #2)
Select this option to enable Slot #1 (or Slot #2) for the Repeater.
 Name
Enter a name for the slot. This name will be displayed in the Dispatch
Console.
 Messaging Delay
From the drop-down list, select the inter-repeater messaging delay
based on the IP network configuration.
• Normal
The inter-repeater messaging delay is 60 ms.
• High
The inter-repeater messaging delay is 90 ms.
 Use the slot for RX data only (GPS Revert or Data Revert)
Select this option to configure the slot so that it will only receive data,
thus having no transmission capability.
 Use Privacy
Select this option to use Privacy for the slot.
Note: This option is available only if the Basic or Enhanced
Privacy Type have been selected in Repeater's Privacy
settings.

5.9 Radio Systems 43

  Privacy Key
From the drop-down list, select the privacy key.
Note: This option is available only if the Enhanced Privacy
Type has been selected in Repeater's Privacy settings).

 Allow interruption
Select this option to allow interrupting dispatcher transmissions by
radios that are Transmit Interrupt capable.
 Always transmit when the PTT is pressed ("Impolite" channel
access)
Select this option so that when the PTT button is pressed, the
dispatcher will start transmitting regardless of whether the channel is
free or not (that is any transmission in progress will be interrupted).
 Data Call confirmed
Select this option to enable data packets in data calls (ARS, GPS, and
Text Message) on the current slot to be confirmed.
Note: This feature is available only when both the Use NAI
Voice and Use NAI Data (MNIS and DDMS) options are
not selected in the Repeater pane.

 Private Call Confirmed

Select this option to set Private calls on the current slot as confirmed.
By default, Private calls are unconfirmed.
 Emergency Alarm Ack
Select this option so that the Dispatch Console is allowed to
acknowledge an emergency alarm received via this slot.
 Emergency Call/Alarm Indication
Select this option so that audio and visual indication is given for an
emergency call/emergency alarm received via this slot.

5.9.2.6 Local Slots

While on a local slot, voice or data are not transmitted between sites in IPSC
systems. Due to MOTOTRBO limitations TRBOnet Server can only receive
information from local slots, but cannot transmit by IP connection to such slots.

Note: Local slots are available only when IP Site Connect is selected,
and the Use NAI Voice option is selected in the Repeater
pane.
If the Use NAI Voice option is not selected, local slots will be
available only through dedicated control stations.

• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Repeater, select

Local Slots.

44 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Local Slots pane, specify the following Local Slot-related settings:
 To add a Local Slot to the system, click Add.
 Select the option in the first column to enable the selected local slot.
 Enter a Name for the local slot. This name will be displayed in the
Dispatch Console.
 Enter the Peer ID of the repeater.
Note: This value can be taken from the repeater's
configuration in MOTOTRBO CPS, in General
Settings>Radio ID.

 From the drop-down list, select the Peer Slot.

 To configure the selected local slot, click Configure:

 Specify the desired local slot settings similar to those for a common
repeater slot.

5.9.2.7 Audio Paths

The Audio Paths are talk paths of the system to make and receive Voice Calls; in
general, they are talk groups. TRBOnet Server requires that all audio paths of a
Capacity Plus system be registered in its configuration. If an audio path is not

5.9 Radio Systems 45

 registered, the TRBOnet operator will not be able to receive and transmit to the
corresponding talk group.

Note: Audio paths are available only when Capacity Plus or Linked
Capacity Plus are selected.

• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Repeater, select

Audio Paths.

• In the Audio Paths pane, specify the following Audio Path-related

settings:
 To add an audio path to the system, click Add.
 Make sure the check box in the first column is selected to make and
receive voice calls on the selected talk path.
 From the drop-down list, select the Call Type for the audio path. The
available call types are All Call, Group Call, and Private Call.
 Enter the Group ID, which is an ID of the talk group the dispatcher can
make calls to. The Group ID is not applicable for Private Calls and All
Calls.
 Enter the Site ID of the site the audio path will belong to in a Linked
Capacity Plus system. Or, leave zero value in this column. In this case,
the Site ID will be displayed as Wide, meaning that the audio path will
belong to all sites in the system.
 To configure the selected audio path, click Configure.
 Specify the desired audio path settings similar to those for a common
repeater slot.

5.9.3 Adding a Capacity MAX System

• In the Radio Systems pane, click Add.
Or, in the Configuration pane, right-click Radio Systems.

46 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the drop-down menu, click Add Capacity MAX.

Note that a Capacity Max system can only be integrated with TRBOnet PLUS
software. For more information on how to configure and deploy a Capacity
MAX system, see TRBOnet PLUS MOTOTRBO Capacity MAX Deployment Guide.

5.9.4 Adding a DIMETRA Express System

• In the Radio Systems pane, click Add.
Or, in the Configuration pane, right-click Radio Systems.
• In the drop-down menu, click Add DIMETRA Express.
For more information on how to configure and deploy a DIMETRA Express
system, see TRBOnet DIMETRA Express Deployment Guide.

5.9.5 Adding a Control Station

• In the Radio Systems pane, click Add.
Or, in the Configuration pane, right-click Radio Systems.
• In the drop-down menu, click Add Control Station.

• In the Control Station pane, specify the following control station-related

parameters:
 Name
Enter a name for the control station. This name will be displayed in the
Dispatch Console in the Voice Dispatch Radio Interface pane. It will be
the name at the top of the PTT box.
 Radio ID
This is the Radio ID of the radio unit connected as a control station.
(for Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus systems, the maximum
value is 65535).

5.9 Radio Systems 47

 Note: This box is populated automatically once you have
successfully tested the control station by clicking the
Test button.

 IP Address
Enter, or select from the list, the IP Address of the control station
network interface.
Note: This value can be taken from the radio's configuration
in MOTOTRBO CPS, in Network>Accessory IP.

 Test
Click this button to check the connection to the control station. If the
test is successful, you'll see the information on the control station you
are connected to, such as radio ID, serial number, firmware version,
and other relevant information.
 Mode
From the drop-down list, select the connection mode for the control
station being configured. For more details, see section 5.9.5.1, Control
Station Connection Modes (page 48).
 System Identifier
Enter the system identifier with which the control station is used within
a Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus system. Note that the system
identifier should be the same for all control stations used in a (Linked)
Capacity Plus system.
 Use the radio for RX data only (GPS Revert or Data Revert)
Select this option to configure the radio channel so that it will only
receive data, thus having no transmission capability.
 Playback device
From the drop-down list, select the playback device on the PC that will
be used to transfer audio data to the connected control station.
 Recorder device
From the drop-down list, select the recording device on the PC that will
be used to receive audio data from the control station connected via a
line-in jack.

5.9.5.1 Control Station Connection Modes

Single Control Station
The Single Station mode is the simplest connection mode for receiving and
transmitting voice and data through a conventional channel using one control
station at this particular frequency.

48 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Subscriber #2
Control Station

Subscriber #1 Subscriber #N

LAN/WAN

TRBOnet Dispatch Console

Server

IP Site Connect
The IPSC is a digital conventional two-way MOTOTRBO system that allows you
to extend the area of your communications by providing 2 wide area channels
per repeater. It is possible to connect up to 15 repeaters in one system using IP
connection.
The Server Connection Modes are as follows:
1. TRBOnet Server is connected to a repeater with two time slots in the
"IP Site Connect" mode. The Server can transmit and receive over IP.
2. TRBOnet Server has no IP connection to a repeater. Two control
stations are required to transmit and receive voice and data, that is,
one control station per time slot.
Site 1 Site 2 Site 3
Control Station
Slot 2

USB
+ Control Station
Audio Slot 1

TRBOnet
Server Repeater 1 Master Repeater 2 Peer Repeater 3 Peer

LAN\WAN

Dispatcher 1 Dispatcher 2 Dispatcher 3

Common Channel
The Common Channel is a mode where it is possible to use multiple simplex
base stations operating at the same frequency with overlapping
communication zones.
This mode allows the customer to provide radio coverage to large areas when
there is only one frequency and additional frequencies are unavailable. While in

5.9 Radio Systems 49

 this mode, the coverage area is being extended only for the dispatcher, and
specifically when operating at one and the same frequency. When a radio unit
initiates a call, the signal that can potentially be received by several base
stations will be filtered on the server side so that repeated audio playback and
recording is prohibited.
The signal filtering is performed based on the "first packet", that is, only the
signal coming first to the server is played back and recorded, while the
remaining signals are discarded.
When a dispatcher initiates a call to a specific base station, the signals received
by the neighboring base stations will be discarded to prevent dispatchers from
listening to their own call at the time of transmission. The dispatcher is not
recommended to place a simultaneous call to all base stations to avoid
interference to the subscribers.
The recommended way to use this mode is as follows: each base station is
configured with its own color code, and radio units are equipped with option
boards having a Geo-roaming feature, and each geographic area is assigned its
own radio channel with the corresponding color code.

Subscriber
#2
Subscriber Subscriber
Subscriber #N #2 Subscriber
#1 #N
Subscriber
Control Station #2* #1
USB +Audio
Control Station
#N*
USB +Audio
USB +Audio

Subscriber
#2 Subscriber TRBOnet
#N Server
Subscriber
#1

Control Station #1* Dispatch Console

All control stations in the system
operating the same frequency.

Capacity Plus/Linked Capacity Plus

Capacity Plus is a digital trunked two-way MOTOTRBO system that allows you
to accommodate high volume communication. It is designed to organize stable
connection in a few groups within one building or a set of buildings. This
system type allows you to increase the number of channels for voice and data
transmission between the subscribers and control centers. The subscribers are
always automatically forwarded to a free channel. The main objective of
Capacity Plus is to support more simultaneous voice and data transmissions
within one capacious system.
In the Capacity Plus mode you can configure voice and data control stations to
transmit and receive data over the air as it is described in the MOTOTRBO
System Planner. Keep in mind that two data control stations are required per

50 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

each data repeater – one per time slot. TRBOnet Dispatch Software provides
you an option to utilize an IP connection to receive voice and data.

Talk Group 1

Dispatcher 1

Master Voice Repeater 1

Dispatcher 2

Voice Repeater 2
Dispatcher 3
Talk Group 2

LAN/WAN
Voice Repeater 3

TRBOnet
Server

Data Repeater 4
USB USB
+
Audio
Data Control Station(s)
1 Data CS per 1 data
Data Repeater 5
repeater time slot
Voice Control Station(s)
1 Voice CS per 1 talk
group

5.9.5.2 Advanced Settings

• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Control Station,
select Advanced Settings.

• In the Advanced Settings pane, specify the following control station-

related advanced settings:
 Automatically reset alarm mode
Select this option to reset alarm mode on the control station radio
automatically. It is recommended to enable this option.
 Automatically handle call alert
Select this option to automatically redirect call alerts from the control
station radio to the Dispatch Console.

5.9 Radio Systems 51

  Emergency Call/Alarm indication
Select this option so that audio and visual indication is given by the
control station radio when an Emergency Call/Emergency Alarm is
received.
 Use front microphone (for PTT key up)
Select this option to use a remote control of the PTT button via a
remote speaker microphone on the radio.
 Always transmit when the PTT is pressed ("Impolite" channel
access)
Select this option so that when the PTT button is pressed, the radio will
start transmitting regardless of whether the channel is free or not (that
is any transmission in progress will be interrupted).
 Use serial port for PTT key up
Select this option to use a remote control of the PTT button via the
serial port of the PC, and select the serial port from the drop-down list.
 TX Timeout
Enter the time, in seconds, to be used as a voice session limit. When a
dispatcher starts any voice session in the Dispatch Console, the
ongoing transmission will be interrupted after this TX Timeout expires.
 Signaling system
From the drop-down list, select the signaling system.
• MDC-1200 signaling is a Motorola data system using audio
frequency-shift keying (AFSK) using a 1,200 baud data rate. A
general option setting for the system is to enable or disable an
acknowledgement (ACK) data packet.
• SELECT-5 (5 Tone Signaling System). In the 5 Tone Signaling
Systems, each radio has a unique numeric identity (for example,
12345). To signal the number 12345, a sequence of 5 tones is sent.
Sequences of audible tones of a very short duration are sent
between radios. Most 5 tone sequences take less than half a second
to send. Available for Voice Calls, Radio Check, Call Alert, and
Enable/Disable Radio.
Click the Configure link and specify desired SELECT 5 settings.

52 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Quick Call I. Using this signaling system, the radio sends a pair of
tones followed by 50 to 1,000 milliseconds of silence and then a
second pair of tones.
Click the Configure link and specify desired Quick Call I settings.

• Quick Call II. Using this signaling system, the radio sends a single
tone followed by 50 to 1,000 milliseconds of silence and then a
second tone.
Click the Configure link and specify desired Quick Call II settings.
• Quick Call II MOTOTRBO
When this system is selected, the parameters are configured on the
radio unit via the MOTOTRBO CPS.
 Allow CSBK Data
Select this option so that GPS data is sent in a single CSBK.

5.9.5.3 Audio Paths

The Audio Paths are talk paths of the system to make and receive Voice Calls; in
general, they are talk groups. TRBOnet Server requires that all audio paths of a
radio system be registered in its configuration. If an audio path is not
registered, the TRBOnet operator will not be able to receive and transmit to the
corresponding talk group.

Note: Audio paths are available only when one of the following
modes is selected: Capacity Plus, Linked Capacity Plus,
Connect Plus, or Capacity MAX.

• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Control Station,

select Audio Paths.

5.9 Radio Systems 53

 • In the Audio Paths pane, specify the following Audio Path-related
settings:
 To add an audio path to the system, click Add.
 Make sure the check box in the first column is selected to make and
receive voice calls from the selected subscriber.
 From the drop-down list, select the Call Type for the audio path. The
available call types are All Call, Group Call, and Private Call.
 Enter the Group ID, which is an ID of the talk group the dispatcher can
make calls to. The Group ID is not applicable for Private Calls and All
Calls.
 In the Site column, select either Local or Wide. The value Wide means
that the audio path will be to all sites in the system and not just to the
local site.

5.9.6 Adding a TRBOnet Swift Agent

The TRBOnet Swift Agent functions as a gateway to receive and transmit voice
and data.
• In the Radio Systems pane, click Add.
Or, in the Configuration pane, right-click Radio Systems.
• In the drop-down menu, click Add TRBOnet Swift Agent.

54 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the TRBOnet Swift Agent pane, specify the following Swift Agent-
related parameters:
 Name
Enter a name for the Swift Agent. This name will be displayed in the
Dispatch Console.
 Radio ID
This is the Radio ID of the control station connected to the Swift Agent.
(for Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus systems, the maximum
value is 65535).
Note: This box is populated automatically once you have
successfully tested the Swift Agent by clicking the Test
button.

 IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the Swift Agent network interface.
 Port
Enter the port number of the Swift Agent connection (8002, by default).
 TRBOnet Local Port
Enter the local port number that will be used by TRBOnet Server to
establish a connection to the Swift Agent. The value 0 (default) means
that a random port will be used.
 Test
Click this button to check the connection to the Swift Agent. If the test
is successful, you'll see the information on the Swift Agent you are
connected to, such as Serial number, Firmware version, and other
relevant information.

5.9 Radio Systems 55

  Mode
From the drop-down list, select the connection mode for the Swift
Agent being configured. For more details, see section 5.9.5.1, Control
Station Connection Modes (page 48).
 System Identifier
Enter the system identifier if the control station is used with a Capacity
Plus or Linked Capacity Plus system. Note that the system identifier
should be the same for all control stations used in the radio system.
 Use the radio for RX data only (GPS Revert or Data Revert)
Select this option to configure the radio channel so that it will only
receive data, thus having no transmission capability.
 VoIP port
Enter the port number for audio communications (4000, by default).
Note: This setting is used for older firmware versions of
TRBOnet Swift Agent.

 Audio Format
From the drop-down list, select the format to transmit audio data.

5.9.6.1 Advanced Settings

• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding TRBOnet Swift
Agent, select Advanced Settings.

• In the Advanced Settings pane, specify the following Swift Agent-related

advanced settings:
 Automatically reset alarm mode
Select this option to reset alarm mode on the control station radio
automatically. It is recommended to enable this option.

56 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Emergency Call/Alarm indication

Select this option so that audio and visual indication is given by the
Control Station radio when an Emergency Call/Emergency Alarm is
received.
 Always transmit when the PTT is pressed ("Impolite" channel
access)
Select this option so that that when the PTT button is pressed, the
radio will start transmitting regardless of whether the channel is free
or not (that is any transmission in progress will be interrupted).
 TX Timeout
Enter the time, in seconds, to be used as a voice session limit. When a
dispatcher starts any voice session in the Dispatch Console,
transmission will be interrupted after this TX Timeout expires.
 PTT Mode
From the drop-down list, select the mode of pressing the PTT on the
radio.
 Signaling system
From the drop-down list, select the signaling system.
• MDC-1200 signaling is a Motorola data system using audio
frequency shift keying (ASFK) using a 1,200 baud data rate. A
general option is to enable or disable an acknowledgement (ACK)
data packet.
• SELECT-5 (5 Tone Signaling System). In the 5 Tone Signaling
Systems, each radio has a unique numeric identity (for example,
12345). To signal the number 12345, a sequence of 5 tones is sent.
Sequences of audible tones of a very short duration are sent
between radios. Most 5 tone sequences take less than half a second
to send. Available for Voice Calls, Radio Check, Call Alert, and
Enable/Disable Radio.
Click the Configure link and specify desired SELECT 5 settings.
• Quick Call I. Using this signaling system, the radio sends a pair of
tones followed by 50 to 1,000 milliseconds of silence and then a
second pair of tones.
Click the Configure link and specify desired Quick Call I settings.
• Quick Call II. Using this signaling system, the radio sends a single
tone followed by 50 to 1,000 milliseconds of silence and then a
second tone.
Click the Configure link and specify desired Quick Call II settings.
• Quick Call II MOTOTRBO
When this system is selected, the parameters are configured for the
radio units via the MOTOTRBO CPS.

5.9 Radio Systems 57

 5.9.6.2 Redundancy
A Redundant TRBOnet Swift Agent will be used when a connection to the Main
TRBOnet Swift Agent is lost.
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding TRBOnet Swift
Agent, select Redundancy.

• In the Redundancy pane, specify the following Redundant Agent-related

settings:
 Click Add and specify the desired parameters for the Redundant Agent
being added.
• IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the Swift Agent that will be used as a
Redundant Swift Agent.
• Port
Enter the port number that will be used for connections between
the server and the Redundant Swift Agent (8002, by default).
• Click Test to check the connection to the Redundant Swift Agent.
If the test is successful, you'll see the information on the Swift Agent
you are connected to, such as Serial number, Firmware version, and
other relevant information.
• Local Port
Enter the port number that will be used for connections from the
Redundant Swift Agent. The value 0 (default) means that a random
port will be used.

5.9.7 Adding an XRC Controller

The XRC Controller is a site controller that provides a channel for transferring
data between sites and managing data flow.

58 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Radio Systems pane, click Add.

Or, in the Configuration pane, right-click Radio Systems.
• In the drop-down menu, click Add XRC-9000 Controller.

• In the Controller pane, specify the following XRC controller-related

parameters:
 Name
Enter a name for the XRC controller. This name will be displayed in the
Dispatch Console.
 IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the XRC controller network interface.
 Click Test to check the connection to the controller.
 System Identifier
Enter the system identifier. Note that the system identifier should be
the same through all the controllers in a Connect Plus system.

5.9.7.1 Services
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding XRC Controller,
select Services.

5.9 Radio Systems 59

 • In the Services pane, specify the following XRC controller-related
services:
 Automatic Registration service (ARS) provides an automated data
application registration for the radio. When the radio powers up, it
automatically registers with the server. This feature is used with data
applications, that is any data traffic on this channel is associated with
an application server, such as MOTOTRBO Text Messaging or
MOTOTRBO Location Service. This option is selected by default and
cannot be cleared.
• Controller port
Enter the controller's port number for ARS service (4005, by default).
• Local port
Enter the local port of the PC with TRBOnet Dispatch Software. The
value 0 (default) means that a random port will be used.
 Location service (GPS)
Select this option to enable Location service on the controller. The
radio can send its coordinates when it is in Global Positioning coverage
area. GPS settings can be configured in the Service Management
pane (see section 5.7.2, Location Service).
• Controller port
Enter the controller's port number for Location service (4001, by
default).
• Local port
Enter the local port of the PC with TRBOnet Dispatch Software (4001,
by default).
• Use adaptive GPS trigger
Select this option to use the adaptive GPS polling interval.

60 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Text Messaging service (TMS)

Select this option to enable text message transmission on the
controller.
• Port
Enter the controller's port number for Text Messaging service (4007,
by default).
• Local port
Enter the local port of the PC with TRBOnet Dispatch Software (4007,
by default).
• Dispatcher ID
Enter the Dispatcher ID. The Dispatcher ID should belong to
TRBOnet Server account in a Connect Plus system.
 Multi Gate Connection
Select this option to use a multi-gate connection and enter the
corresponding Subscribe ID.

5.9.7.2 Advanced Settings

• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding XRC Controller,
select Advanced Settings.

• In the Advanced Settings pane, specify the following XRC controller-

related services:
 Radio ID list
Enter a list of the radios to receive data from according to the following
rules:
• To receive data from all radios in the system, leave this box blank.
• To receive data from multiple radios, separate each Radio ID by a
comma, for example, 105,106,111, and so on.
• To receive data from a range of radios, enter the range using the
following example: 105-111.

5.9 Radio Systems 61

 Note: In the Radio ID list, enter Radio IDs only, without
mentioning Radio Names and/or the word "Radio".

 Specify external sites

This is the list of Connect Plus sites that is used when the
corresponding Connect Plus system has a MOTOROLA System Bridge
to the current Capacity MAX system.
• Click the Add button and add a site by specifying its Site ID and
selecting the appropriate data types (Presence, Voice, and/or
Data).

5.9.7.3 Redundancy
A redundant XRC controller will be used when a connection to the main XRC
controller is lost.
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding XRC Controller,
select Redundancy.

• In the Redundancy pane, specify the following redundant XRC controller-

related settings:
 Click Add and specify the desired parameters for the redundant XRC
controller being added.
• IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the XRC controller that will be used as a
redundant XRC controller.
• Controller Port
Enter the port number of the redundant XRC controller for incoming
connections (4005, by default).

62 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Click Test to check the connection to the redundant XRC Controller.

If the test is successful, you'll see the information on the XRC
controller you are connected to, such as serial number, firmware
version, and other relevant information.
• Local Port
Enter the port number that will be used for incoming connections
from the redundant XRC controller. The value 0 (default) means that
a random port will be used.

5.9.8 Adding an XRT Controller

The XRT controller functions as a voice gateway connected to each XRC
controller in a Connect Plus system.
• In the Radio Systems pane, click Add.
Or, in the Configuration pane, right-click Radio Systems.
• In the drop-down menu, click Add XRT-9000 Controller.

• In the Controller pane, specify the following XRT Controller-related

parameters:
 System Name
Enter a name for the XRT Controller. This name will be displayed in the
Dispatch Console.
 Radio ID
Enter the individual virtual radio ID. The virtual Radio ID is required to
do the following:
• Make all types of voice calls from XRT Controller to radios,
dispatchers and groups.
• Send commands (for example, Remote Monitor).

5.9 Radio Systems 63

  Start Local Port
Enter the local port of the PC with TRBOnet Server. The value 0
(default) means that a random port will be used.
XRT Controller Info:
 Controller IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the XRT controller network interface.
 Controller TCP Port
Enter the port number of the XRT controller to be used for connections
via TCP (10001, by default).
 Click Test to check the connection to the XRT controller.
 User Name
Enter the user name. For the user name, refer to the XRT controller
configuration.
 Password
Enter the password for the user. For the password, refer to the XRT
controller configuration.
Note: The user name and password should belong to the
same TRBOnet Connect Plus account and be
appropriately configured.

 System Identifier
Enter the system identifier. Note that the system identifier should be
the same through all the controllers in a Connect Plus system.
 Monitor Voice sessions (without audio)
This is the Billing feature. Select this option to monitor only PTT press
events.

5.9.8.1 Privacy
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding XRT Controller,
select Privacy.

64 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Privacy pane, specify the following Privacy-related settings:

 Privacy Type
From the drop-down list, select one of the privacy types: None, Basic,
or Enhanced.
 Basic Privacy Key ID
Enter the Privacy Key ID available for the Basic privacy type.
 Enhanced Privacy Keys
Here you add enhanced privacy keys when the Enhanced privacy type
is selected.
• Click Add and specify the required Algorithm, ID, Name, and Value
for the privacy key being added.
 Algorithm
From the drop-down list, select one of the enhanced algorithms if
you are going to use additional encryption.
5.9.8.2 Data Path
The Data Paths are used to transmit data in a Connect Plus system.
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding XRT Controller,
select Data Path.

• In the Data Path pane, specify the following data path-related settings:
 Data Service
From the drop-down list, select the data service to be used to transfer
data.
 Radio ID
Enter the Radio ID of the data service.

5.9.8.3 Audio Paths

The Audio Paths are talk paths of the system to make and receive voice calls; in
general, they are talk groups. TRBOnet Server requires that all audio paths of a

5.9 Radio Systems 65

 Connect Plus system be registered in its configuration. If an audio path is not
registered, the TRBOnet operator will not be able to receive and transmit to the
corresponding talk group.
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding XRT Controller,
select Audio Paths.

• In the Audio Paths pane, specify the following Audio Path-related

settings:
 To add an Audio Path to the system, click Add.
 Make sure the check box in the first column is selected to make and
receive Voice Calls from the selected subscriber.
 From the drop-down list, select the Call Type for the audio path. The
available call types are All Call, Group Call, and Private Call.
 Enter the Source ID for Private Calls. In general, this is TRBOnet’s
Radio ID. If more than one Radio ID is specified in a Connect Plus
system (for example, for different dispatchers), the corresponding talk
paths should be added for all of them.
 Enter the Target ID for Group Calls. This is the Radio ID of the talk
group to make a call to. The Target ID is not applicable for Private Calls
and All Calls.

5.9.8.4 Redundancy
A Redundant XRT Controller will be used when a connection to the Main XRT
Controller is lost.
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding XRT Controller,
select Redundancy.

66 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Redundancy pane, specify the following Redundant XRT

Controller-related settings:
 Click Add and specify the desired parameters for the Redundant XRT
Controller being added.
 Controller IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the XRT Controller that will be used as a
Redundant XRT Controller.
 Controller TCP Port
Enter the port number of the Redundant XRT Controller to be used for
connections via TCP (10001, by default).
 Start Local Port
Enter the local port of the PC with TRBOnet Dispatch Software. The
value 0 (default) means that a random port will be used.
 Click Test to check the connection to the Redundant XRT Controller.
If the test is successful, you'll see the information on the XRT Controller
you are connected to, such as Serial number, Firmware version, and
other relevant information.

5.9.9 Adding a Selex Repeater

The Selex repeater is configured as a stand-alone repeater which supports
connections to MOTOTRBO™ radios to transmit voice and data in digital,
analog, and mixed modes.
• In the Radio Systems pane, click Add.
Or, in the Configuration pane, right-click Radio Systems.
• In the drop-down menu, click Add SELEX Repeater.

5.9 Radio Systems 67

 • In the Selex pane, specify the following Selex Repeater-related
parameters:
 Name
Enter a name for the Selex Repeater. This name will be displayed in the
Dispatch Console.
 Radio ID
Enter the Radio ID for the Selex Repeater (for Capacity Plus systems,
the maximum value is 65535).
The Radio ID is an individual ID that uniquely identifies the radio. This
ID is used by other calling radios when addressing the radio, for
instance, when making a private call or sending a text message.
 Repeater Mode
From the drop-down list, select the mode. The available modes are
Digital, Analog, Mixed, and Tier III.

5.9.9.1 Advanced Settings

• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Selex, select
Advanced Settings.

68 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Advanced Settings pane, specify the following Selex Repeater-

related advanced settings:
 Keep Alive Interval
Enter the time interval, in seconds, for TRBOnet Server to check the
connection to the Selex repeater (10, by default).
 TX Timeout
Enter the time, in seconds, to be used as a voice session limit. When a
Dispatcher starts any Voice Session in the Dispatch Console,
transmission will be interrupted after this TX Timeout expires (60, by
default).
 Audio Frame Size
Set the audio frame size, in milliseconds.

5.9.9.2 Slots
The Selex repeater has two available slots (in Digital or Mixed mode) to
transmit voice and data.
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Selex, select Slot #1
or Slot #2.

5.9 Radio Systems 69

 • In the Slot #1 (or Slot #2) pane, specify the following slot-related
parameters:
 Name
Enter a name for the slot. This name will be displayed in the Dispatch
Console.
 TRBOnet IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the PC with TRBOnet Dispatch Software. Enter
the Port number (6080, by default).
 SELEX IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the Selex Repeater (refer to the repeater
configuration). Enter the Port number (6080, by default).
 Click Test to check the connection to the repeater.
 Use the gateway for RX data only (GPS Revert or Data Revert)
Select this option to configure the channel so that it will only receive
data, thus having no transmission capability.
 Use Encryption
Select this option to encrypt voice and data traffic over IP.
 Always transmit when the PTT is pressed ("Impolite" channel
access)
Select this option so that that when the PTT button is pressed, the
radio will start transmitting regardless of whether the channel is free
or not (that is any transmission in progress will be interrupted).
 Data Call Confirmed
Select this option to enable individual packets in data calls (ARS, GPS,
and Text Message) on the current slot to be confirmed.
 Private Call Confirmed
Select this option to set Private calls on the current slot as confirmed.

70 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

5.9.9.3 Tier III and Audio Paths

The Selex repeater can be used in a Tier III mode. To configure this mode, do
the following:
• While in the Selex pane, select Tier III from the Repeater Mode drop-
down list.
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Selex, select
Tier III.

• In the Tier III pane, specify the following Tier III-related parameters:
 Use Encryption
Select this option to encrypt voice and data traffic over IP.
 Always transmit when the PTT is pressed ("Impolite" channel
access)
Select this option so that that when the PTT button is pressed, the
radio will start transmitting regardless of whether the channel is free
or not (that is any transmission in progress will be interrupted).
 Private Call Confirmed
Select this option to set Private calls on the current slot as confirmed.
To configure Audio Paths:
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Selex, select
Audio Paths.
Note: Make sure the Tier III mode has been selected as a
Repeater Mode for the Selex repeater.

5.9 Radio Systems 71

 • In the Audio Paths pane, specify the following Audio Path-related
settings:
 To add an Audio Path to the system, click Add.
 Make sure the check box in the first column is selected to make and
receive Voice Calls from the selected subscriber.
 From the drop-down list, select the Call Type for the audio path. The
available call types are All Call, Group Call, and Private Call.
 Enter the Group ID, which is a radio ID of the talk group to make a call
to. The Group ID is not applicable for Private Calls and All Calls.

5.9.9.4 Analog channel

The Selex repeater can also use the Analog channel.
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Selex, select
Analog.
Note: Make sure the Analog or Mixed mode have been
selected as a Repeater Mode for the Selex repeater.

72 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Analog pane, specify the following Analog channel-related

settings:
 Name
Enter a name for the Selex repeater in the analog mode. This name will
be displayed in the Dispatch Console.
 TRBOnet IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the PC with TRBOnet Dispatch Software. Enter
the Port number (6080, by default).
 SELEX IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the Selex Repeater (refer to the repeater
configuration). Enter the Port number (6080, by default).
 Click Test to check the connection to the repeater.
 Always transmit when the PTT is pressed ("Impolite" channel
access)
Select this option so that when the PTT button is pressed, the radio will
start transmitting regardless of whether the channel is free or not (that
is any transmission in progress will be interrupted).

5.9.10 Adding a Kairos Repeater

The Radio Activity Kairos repeater is configured as a stand-alone repeater
which supports connections to MOTOTRBO™ radios to transmit voice and data
in digital, analog, and mixed modes.

Note: When the Kairos repeater is connected, the following

TRBOnet Dispatch features are not supported: Remote
Monitor, Radio Enable/Disable, Kill Radio, and Telemetry.

• In the Radio Systems pane, click Add.

Or, in the Configuration pane, right-click Radio Systems.
• In the drop-down menu, click Add KAIROS Repeater.

5.9 Radio Systems 73

 • In the Kairos pane, specify the following repeater-related parameters:
 Name
Enter a name for the Kairos repeater. This name will be displayed in
the Dispatch Console.
 IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the Kairos repeater network interface.
 User Name
Enter the user name. For the user name, refer to the Kairos repeater
configuration.
 Password
Enter the password for the user. For the password, refer to the Kairos
repeater configuration.
 Radio ID
Enter the Radio ID, which is a gateway for voice and data. The Radio ID
must be unique in the radio system.
 Repeater Mode
From the drop-down list, select the mode. The available modes are
Digital, Analog, and Mixed.

5.9.10.1 Advanced Settings

• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Kairos, select
Advanced Settings.

74 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Advanced Settings pane, specify the following Kairos Repeater-

related advanced settings:
 Keep Alive Interval
Enter the time interval, in seconds, for TRBOnet Server to check the
connection to the Kairos repeater (10, be default).
 TX Timeout
Enter the time, in seconds, to be used as a voice session limit. When a
Dispatcher starts any Voice Session in the Dispatch Console,
transmission will be interrupted after this TX Timeout expires (60, be
default).
Voice Call Hang Time (ms):
 Group Call
This value sets the duration the repeater reserves the channel after the
end of a group call transmission. During this time, only members of
the group that the channel is reserved for can transmit.
 Private Call
This value sets the duration a radio keeps the private call setup after a
user releases the PTT button. This is to avoid setting up the call again
each time a user presses the PTT button to transmit. During this time,
other radios can still transmit since the channel is essentially idle. After
the hang timer expires, the radio transmits using the TX Contact Name
parameter specified for this channel in MOTOTRBO CPS.
 Emergency Call
This value sets the duration the repeater reserves the channel after the
end of an emergency call transmission. During this time, only
members of the Group that the channel is reserved for can transmit.
5.9.10.2 Slots
The Kairos repeater has two digital slots (in Digital mode) and one analog slot
(in Mixed or Analog mode) to transmit voice and data.

5.9 Radio Systems 75

 • In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Kairos, select Slot
#1 or Slot #2 (or Analog, if you have selected Mixed or Analog mode).

• In the Slot #1 (or Slot #2) pane, specify the following slot-related
parameters:
 Name
Enter a name for the slot. This name will be displayed in the Dispatch
Console.
 Audio Codec
From the drop-down list, select the audio codec to be used to
compress the audio files.
 Audio port KAIROS/ Audio port TRBOnet
Enter the port numbers to be used for KAIROS/TRBOnet audio ports.
 Data port KAIROS/ Data port TRBOnet
Enter the port numbers to be used for KAIROS/TRBOnet data ports.
Note: Use the matching port numbers for KAIROS and
TRBOnet. The default audio and data port numbers are
40000 and 40001 for Digital slot 1, 40002 and 40003 for
Digital slot 2, and 40004 and 40005 for the Analog slot.

5.9.11 Adding a Wave 5000 Controller

Before creating a connection to the Wave controller, make sure the Wave
server is configured to allow 3rd party applications to connect with a Neocom
Software-specified license key.
• In the Radio Systems pane, click Add.
Or, in the Configuration pane, right-click Radio Systems.
• In the drop-down menu, click Add WAVE 5000 Controller.

76 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Wave 5000 controller pane, specify the following Wave controller-
related parameters:
 Name
Enter a name for the Wave controller. This name will be displayed in
the Dispatch Console.
 Use proxy for connection
Select this option to use a proxy server to connect to the Wave
controller.
 Controller IP Address
Enter, or select from the list, the IP Address of the Wave controller.
 Controller Port
Enter the port number of the Wave controller.
 TRBOnet Local Port
Enter the local port number that will be used by TRBOnet Server to
establish a connection to the Wave controller.
 User Name
Enter the user name. For the user name, refer to the Wave server
configuration.
 Password
Enter the password for the user. For the password, refer to the Wave
server configuration.
 Profile
From the drop-down list, select the profile to be used on the Wave
server.
 Test
Click this button to check the connection to the Wave controller.

5.9 Radio Systems 77

 5.9.12 Adding a Wave OnCloud Gateway
WAVE OnCloud is a Push-to-Talk (PTT) service that connects phones, computers
and radios together.
• In the Radio Systems pane, click Add.
Or, in the Configuration pane, right-click Radio Systems.
• In the drop-down menu, click Add WAVE OnCloud Gateway.
• In the Wave OnCloud Gateway pane, specify the following Wave
gateway-related parameters:
 Name
Enter a name for the Wave OnCloud gateway. This name will be
displayed in the Dispatch Console.
 Authentication FQDN
Enter the fully-qualified domain name of the authentication server.
 Client ID
Enter the Client ID that will be used for authentication.
 Client Secret
Enter the Client Secret that will be used for authentication.
 Agency
Enter the name of the agency that will be used.
 Test
Click this button and see the list of all available agencies.

5.9.13 Adding an Analog Control Station

TRBOnet Dispatch Software allows using analog radios as control stations.
• In the Radio Systems pane, click Add.
Or, in the Configuration pane, right-click Radio Systems.
• In the drop-down menu, click Add Analog Station.

78 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Control Station pane, specify the following Analog Control Station-
related settings:
 Name
Enter a name for the analog control station. This name will be
displayed in the Dispatch Console.
 Playback device
From the drop-down list, select the playback device on the PC that the
control station is connected to.
 Recorder device
From the drop-down list, select the recording device on the PC that the
control station is connected to.
 Serial port
From the drop-down list, select the serial port the control station is
connected to on the PC.
 Always transmit when the PTT is pressed ("Impolite" channel
access) - Select this option so that when the PTT button is pressed, the
radio will start transmitting regardless of whether the channel is free
or not (that is any transmission in progress will be interrupted).
 TX Timeout
Enter the time, in seconds, to be used as a voice session limit. When a
Dispatcher starts any voice session in the Dispatch Console,
transmission will be interrupted after this TX Timeout expires.
 Mic delay time
Enter the time, in milliseconds, to be used as a delay time interval
between pushing the PTT and starting voice communication.
 Extended protocol
From the drop-down-list, select either None, if your radio does not
support the extended protocol, or IC-F1721D v1.01 if the radio
supports the extended protocol.
 Signaling System
From the drop-down-list, select the signaling system (Quick Call I or
Quick Call II). Click the Configure link and specify desired Quick Call
settings. Selecting the signaling system is available only if None is
selected in the Extended Protocol list.

5.9.13.1 Serial Port

Note: The serial port settings are available only when the
extended protocol IC-F1721D v1.01 is selected for the
analog control station.

• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Control Station,

select Serial Port.

5.9 Radio Systems 79

 • In the Serial Port pane, specify the same serial port settings as those on
the radio device connected to the serial port.

5.9.14 Adding an ED137 / Jotron Station

This section describes how to connect an ED137-compatible radio station (for
example, the Jotron 7000 series Multimode Digital Radio).
• In the Radio Systems pane, click Add.
Or, in the Configuration pane, right-click Radio Systems.
• In the drop-down menu, click Add ED137 Station.

• In the ED137 Station pane, specify the following ED137 Station-related

settings:
 Name
Enter a name for the control station. This name will be displayed in the
Dispatch Console.

80 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Local Interface
Enter the IP address of the PC with TRBOnet Server.
 Local Port
Enter the local UDP port number.
 Station Radio User
Enter the SIP ID of the radio station.
 Use Control Port
Select this option and enter the control port number.
 Separated RX and TX stations
Select this option if the receiver and transmitter are separate devices
with different IP addresses.
 IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the receiver/transmitter (or transceiver).
 Port
Enter the port number (5060, by default).

5.9.15 Adding a Zenitel Station

This section describes how to connect a Zenitel station.
• In the Radio Systems pane, click Add.
Or, in the Configuration pane, right-click Radio Systems.
• In the drop-down menu, click Add Zenitel Station.
• In the Zenitel Station pane, specify the following Zenitel-related settings:
 Name
Enter a name for the Zenitel station. This name will be displayed in the
Dispatch Console.
 Radio ID
This is the Radio ID of the Zenitel station.
The maximum value is 65535.
 Local Interface
Enter the IP address of the PC with TRBOnet Server.
 Local Port
Enter the local UDP port number.
 Station IP Address
Enter the IP address of the Zenitel station.
 Station Control Port
Enter the control port on the Zenitel station.
 Station SIP Port
Enter SIP port on the Zenitel station (5060, by default).

5.9 Radio Systems 81

 5.10 PTT over Cellular
To enable connections of Mobile Client applications to TRBOnet Server, you
must configure at least one dedicated gateway.
• In the Configuration pane, select PTT over Cellular.
• In the PTT over Cellular pane, select Enable PoC service.

5.10.1 Advanced Settings

• In the Configuration pane, select PTT over Cellular > Advanced
Settings.
• In the Advanced Settings pane, specify the following parameters:
 Max Call Time
Specify the maximum call time, in minutes.
 Registration Interval
Enter the time interval, in seconds, to check the registration status of
mobile subscribers.

5.10.2 Adding a Mobile Gateway

• In the PTT over Cellular pane, click Add.
• In the Mobile Gateway pane, specify the following parameters:

82 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Name
Enter a name for the mobile gateway.
 System Identifier
Enter the name of the mobile system to which the gateway will belong.
 Local Interface
Enter the IP address of the PC with TRBOnet Server.
 Local Port
Enter the local UDP port number for the Mobile service (5070, by
default).
 Public Address/Domain
This is the public IP address of your PC. Enter the Public Address if your
TRBOnet Server is behind a router. To detect the public address, click
the ellipsis (…) button.

• STUN Server
From the drop-down list, select the STUN Server.
• Detect
Click this button to detect your public IP address.
 First VoIP port
Enter the number of the first VoIP port for audio communications. The
default value is specified in Network Parameters.

5.10 PTT over Cellular 83

 5.11 Teltonika
To integrate Teltonika devices into TRBOnet software:
• In the Configuration pane, select Teltonika.

• In the Teltonika pane:

 Enable Teltonika service
Select this check box and specify the following Telnonika-related
parameters.
 Local Interface
From the drop-down list, select the local network interface that will be
used to communicate between TRBOnet Server and Teltonika devices.
 Local port
Enter the UDP port number to be used.

5.12 Remote Agents

The Remote Agent is TRBOnet Agent installed on a remote PC.
• In the Configuration pane, select Remote Agents.

84 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Remote Agents pane, click Add.

 In the Agent pane, specify the following parameters:

• Agent Name
Enter a name for the remote agent. This name will be displayed in
the Dispatch Console.
• IP Address
Enter the IP address of the remote agent.
• Port
Enter the local port number that will be used by TRBOnet Server to
accept connections from the remote agent.
• Click Test to check the connection to the remote agent.
• Use all services
Choose this option so that all available services will be used on the
remote agent.

5.12 Remote Agents 85

 • Use only specified services
Choose this option and click the Load services from agent link to
load services available on the remote agent.

5.12.1 Redundancy
A Redundant remote agent will be used when a connection to the Main remote
agent fails.
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding Agent, select
Redundancy.

• In the Redundancy pane, click Add.

• In the Remote Agent dialog box, specify the following parameters:

• Agent Name
Enter a name for the redundant remote agent.
• IP Address
Enter the IP address of the redundant remote agent.

86 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Port
Enter the local port number that will be used by TRBOnet Server to
accept connections from the redundant remote agent.
• Click Test to check the connection to the redundant remote agent.
• Use all services
Choose this option so that all available services will be used on the
redundant remote agent.
• Use only specified services
Choose this option and click the Load services from agent link to
load services available on redundant the remote agent.
• Click OK to add a redundant remote agent to the system.

5.13 Friendly Servers

The Friendly Servers are used to transmit voice over IP between dispatchers
connected to different servers.
• In the Configuration pane, select Friendly Servers.

• In the Friendly Servers pane, click Add.

 In the Server dialog box, specify the following parameters:

• Name
Enter a name for the friendly server. This name will be displayed in
the Dispatch Console.

5.13 Friendly Servers 87

 • IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the server.
• Port
Enter the local port number on the PC to connect to the friendly
server.
• Click Test button to check the connection to the friendly server.
• Click OK to add the friendly server to the system.

5.14 Phone Connect

TRBOnet Server has its own built-in SIP server to support VoIP communications
between the radios as well as other SIP-compliant clients. In addition, you can
add multiple external PBX servers to the TRBOnet Server configuration.
• In the Configuration pane, select Phone Connect
• In the Phone Connect pane, select Use Phone Connect.

5.14.1 Advanced Settings

• In the Configuration pane, under Phone Connect, select
Advanced Settings.

88 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Advanced Settings pane, specify the following parameters:

 Max Ring Time
Specify the maximum ringing time, in seconds.
 Max Call Duration
Specify the maximum call time, in minutes.
 Public Address
This is the public IP address of your PC. Enter the Public Address if your
TRBOnet Server is behind a router and an External PBX Server will be
used. To detect the public address, click the ellipsis (…) button.

• STUN Server
From the drop-down list, select the STUN Server.
• Detect
Click this button to detect your public IP address.
 Phone owner address
From the drop-down list, select 'Take from database'. This will enable
determining the street address of a caller.
Click the Configure link.

5.14 Phone Connect 89

 • Add the required fields to the address information.

5.14.2 Internal PBX Server

• Make sure the Internal PBX Server option is selected in the
Phone Connect pane.
• In the Configuration pane, select Internal PBX Server.

• In the Internal PBX Server pane, specify the following parameters:

 Local IP
Enter the IP address of the PC with TRBOnet Server.
 Port
Enter the local UDP port number for the SIP service (5060, by default).
Dispatch Center
 User Extension
Enter the user extension number that will be used by the Dispatch
Center.
 User Name
Enter the user name that will be used by the Dispatch Center.

5.14.2.1 Advanced Settings

• In the Configuration pane, under Internal PBX Server, select
Advanced Settings.

90 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Advanced Settings pane, specify the following Internal PBX Server-
related advanced settings:
 Packet time
Enter the packet length, in milliseconds.
 Codecs
In the drop-down list, select/deselect the codec(s) to be used for audio
compression.
 Registration Interval (sec)
Enter the time interval, in seconds, to check the SIP registration status
of subscribers.
 DTMF Send Mode
Enter mode for sending DTMF tones. The available modes are
RFC 2833, SIP INFO (DTMF relay), and SIP INFO (DTMF).
 First VoIP port
Enter the number of the first VoIP port for audio communications. The
default value is specified in Network Parameters.
 Use VoIP ports
From the drop-down list, select which VoIP ports will be used (all, even,
or odd).

5.14.3 External PBX Server

You can enable multiple external PBX servers to use the SIP Interconnect
feature. This feature enables calls from the radio to the phone and vice versa.
The dispatcher can make a call from the Dispatch Console to a phone as well as
redirect a phone call to a subscriber radio.
• In the Phone Connect pane, click Add.
Or, in the Configuration pane, right-click Phone Connect and choose
Add PBX Server.

5.14 Phone Connect 91

 • In the External PBX Server pane, specify the following parameters:
 Use External PBX Server
Select this option to enable an external PBX server.
Provider options
 Address
Enter your SIP provider address, and select the protocol from the drop-
down list on the right of the address (for more details, contact your SIP
provider).
 Port
Enter the port number of the SIP provider (5060, by default).
 Click Test to check the connection to the provider.
• Local IP
Enter the IP address of the PC with TRBOnet Server.
• Port
Enter the local port number to make connections from.
Dispatch Center

Note: This information is provided by the SIP provider.

 User Extension
Enter the extension number that will be associated with TRBOnet
Server to make and receive calls.
 User Name
Enter the user name for the login.
 User Password
Enter the user password for the login.
 Test Call
Click this button to make a test call.

92 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Note: To make a test call, make sure that the TRBOnet Server
service is not running.

5.14.3.1 Advanced Settings

• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding External PBX
Server, select Advanced Settings.

• In the Advanced Settings pane, specify the following External PBX

Server-related advanced settings:
 Packet time
Enter the same value as specified in the phone system;
 Codecs
In the drop-down list, select/deselect the codecs specified in the phone
system.
Note: For more details on Phone System configuration, see
Appendix B: SIP Setup for Motorola Phone System
(page 393).

 Registration Interval (sec)

Enter the time interval, in seconds, to check the SIP registration status
of subscribers.
 Do not register users on a PBX server (SIP trunk)
Select this option so that radios will use the SIP trunk system to get
extensions.
 Configure user’s authorization
Click this link to set up user authorization for the systems with
enhanced authorization parameters. It is recommended to be used
when Radio ID is equal to SIP ID. In case when Voice is transmitted via
Radio Channel, Radio ID is used. When voice is transmitted via a GSM
channel, the SIP ID is used.

5.14 Phone Connect 93

 • Click Add to add a user.
• User Extension
Enter the extension number for the new user.
• Authorization User Name
Enter the name that will be used as the authorization user name.
• Click OK to save the new user authorization.
 First VoIP port
Enter the number of the first VoIP port for audio communications. The
default value is specified in Network Parameters.
 Use VoIP ports
From the drop-down list, select which VoIP ports will be used (all, even,
or odd).
 Allow outgoing SIP calls
Select this option to allow users to make outgoing SIP calls.
• Available SIP numbers
Enter the range of SIP phone numbers that will be available for
outgoing calls.
5.14.3.2 Redundancy
A Redundant PBX Server be used when a connection to the main PBX Server
fails.
• In the Configuration pane, under the corresponding External PBX
Server, select Redundancy.

94 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Redundancy pane, click Add.

 PBX Server Address
Enter the IP address of the redundant server.
 Check the corresponding port numbers (PBX Server Port and
TRBOnet Local Port).
 Select the check box beside the server address.
 Register users when changing PBX server
Select this check box so that phone users will be registered when the
PBX server is switched to the redundant server.

5.15 Data Sources

The Data Sources feature allows receiving data from third-party applications
and devices.
TRBOnet Dispatch Software can work with the following two data source types:
1. Physical or virtual devices connected via a COM port
2. PCs running third-party applications connected via TCP/IP
To allow TRBOnet Dispatch Software to receive data from a third-party
application or device:
• In the Configuration pane, select Data Sources.

5.15 Data Sources 95

 • In the Data Sources pane, select the Enable Data Sources option.

5.15.1 COM Ports

To manage physical or virtual devices connected to the TRBOnet Server PC via
COM port:
• In the Configuration pane, under Data Sources, select COM ports.

• In the COM ports pane, click Add to add a device.

96 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the COM Port dialog box, specify the following parameters:

 Serial port name
From the drop-down list, select the COM port on the PC with TRBOnet
Server to which the device is connected to.
 Baud rate
From the drop-down list, select the baud rate at which the data is
transmitted.
 Parity-checking protocol
From the drop-down list, select one of the values that represent the
parity-checking protocol.
 Stop bits per byte
From the drop-down list, select the standard number of stop bits per
byte.
 Data bits per byte
From the drop-down list, select the standard length of data bits per
byte.
 Handshaking protocol
From the drop-down list, select the handshaking protocol for serial
port transmission of data.
 Text Encoding
From the drop-down list, select the Text Encoding type.
Note: The Text Encoding types selected in the TRBOnet Server
and in the connected application must be the same to
avoid incorrect text display and incorrect data parsing.

 Message delimiter
From the drop-down list, select the type of delimiters in the data.
Note: The Message delimiter types selected in the TRBOnet
Server and in the connected application must be the
same to avoid incorrect text display and incorrect data
parsing.

 Click OK to save settings and close the dialog box.

5.15 Data Sources 97

 5.15.2 TCP/IP
To manage PCs running third-party applications:
• In the Configuration pane, under Data Sources, select TCP/IP.

• In the TCP/IP pane, click Add to add a TCP/IP connection.

• In the External Connection dialog box, specify the following parameters:

 Name
Enter a name for the TCP/IP connection.
 Mode
From the drop-down list, select the connection mode. The connection
mode depends on the type of the application installed on the
connected PC:
• Client
In this case, the application connects to TRBOnet Server which sends
the data to the application.

98 5 TRBOnet Server
TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Server
In this case, TRBOnet Server accepts connections from the
application and receives the data.
 Remote IP
Enter the IP address of the application server.
Note: Available only when the Server connection mode is
selected.

 Port
In the case of the Client connection mode, select the local port of the
PC with TRBOnet Server PC.
In the case of the Server connection mode, select the port of the PC
where the third-party application is installed.
 Text Encoding
From the drop-down list, select the Text Encoding type.
Note: The Text Encoding types selected in the TRBOnet Server
and in the connected application must be the same to
avoid incorrect text display and incorrect data parsing.

 Ignore the following data

Select this option so that the following messages arriving during the
specified time period will be ignored.
• During
Specify the time period, in minutes, so that similar messages that
arrive during this time period will be ignored.
• Do not consider the following substring
Enter a regular expression that will be used to filter messages upon
arriving and before being processed. For example, the following
regular expression \d{2}:\d{2}:\d{2} means that if a message
contains a substring like 11:01:54, then this substring will be
dropped before processing the message.

5.16 Email Settings

TRBOnet Dispatch Console allows processing emails as follows:
1. Receive emails from email servers and forward them to a particular radio
or talk group (via a POP3 or IMAP server);
2. Send emails from radios to a particular email address (SMTP Server).
Note: Microsoft Exchange Server can be used as SMTP and
POP3/IMAP servers.

• In the Configuration pane, select Email.

• In the Email pane, select Enable Email Server.

5.16 Email Settings 99

 5.16.1 Incoming Mail Server
The Incoming Mail Server is used to synchronize the Incoming Emails folder
located on a mail server with your local PC. If you are using a POP3 server, all
incoming emails can be downloaded from the mail server to the local PC to be
then forwarded as text messages to radios or talk groups.
• In the Configuration pane, under Email, select Incoming Mail Server.

• In the Incoming Mail Server pane, specify the following incoming mail-
related parameters:
 Enable
Select this option to enable Incoming Mail Server.
 Server
Enter the server hostname or IP address.
 This server requires a secure connection (SSL)
Select this option to enable a secure connection. Note that a dedicated
port will be used to connect to the mail server via SSL.

100 5 TRBOnet Server

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Note: The port number will automatically change when you

select this option. For example, from 110 to 995 for
POP3, and from 143 to 993 for IMAP.

 Port
The port number to be used for the connection.
Note: This box is populated automatically depending on the
selected protocol and whether a secure connection is
required.

 Protocol
From the drop-down list, select either IMAP or POP3. Note that if you
select POP3, all email messages will be deleted from the server once
you have downloaded them. In the case of IMAP, all new messages will
be marked as read once you have downloaded them.
Note: The port number will automatically change when you
change the protocol.

 Check for new messages every X seconds

Enter the time interval to check for new email messages (60, by
default).
 Connect using
Choose one of the following options:
• Anonymous access
Choose this option to use an anonymous access to the incoming
mail server.
• Windows authentication
Choose this option to connect via TRBOnet Service Windows
Account, if it is running under a specific account;
• Use login and password
Choose this option and specify the credentials for the mailbox:
 Login
Enter the incoming mail server login.
 Password
Enter the incoming mail server password.
 Check New Emails Now
Click this button to synchronize the Incoming Emails folder and check
for new emails.

5.16.2 Outgoing Mail Server

The SMTP Server is used to send emails from users to mail servers as well as
between mail servers to deliver emails to the final destination.

5.16 Email Settings 101

 For example, the Administrator can enable email notifications from TRBOnet
Dispatch Console to particular email users when alarms occur on selected
radios. In this case, the radio sends an alarm to TRBOnet Server which in turn
converts this alarm to text and then forwards it as an email message to
particular email addresses (for example, to [email protected]).
• In the Configuration pane, under Email, select Outgoing Mail Server.

• In the Outgoing Mail Server pane, specify the following outgoing mail-
related parameters:
 Enable
Select this option to enable Outgoing Mail Server.
 Sender Email
Enter the email address (optional) of the sender.
 SMTP server
Enter the server hostname or IP address of the SMTP server.
 Encryption
From the drop-down list, select the encryption protocol (SSL, TLS) if a
secure connection is required, or select None if not. Note that three
different dedicated ports will be used to connect to the mail server: via
SSL, TLS, or with no encryption.
Note: The port number will automatically change when you
select the encryption protocol. For example, from 25 (no
encryption) to 465 for SSL, and to 587 for TLS.

 SMTP server port

The port number to be used for the connection.
Note: This box is populated automatically depending on the
selected encryption protocol.

102 5 TRBOnet Server

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Connect using
Choose one of the following options:
• Anonymous access
Choose this option to use an anonymous access to the SMTP server.
• Windows authentication
Choose this option to connect via TRBOnet Service Windows
Account, if it is running under a specific account;
• Use SMTP user name and password
Choose this option and specify the credentials for the mailbox:
 User name
Enter the SMTP server user name.
 Password
Enter the SMTP server password.
 Type
From the drop-down list, select the SMPT login type.
 Send Test Message
Click this button to send a test message from the Sender Email
address.

5.17 SMS Notifications

TRBOnet Dispatch Console allows sending SMS notifications to a cell phone
when alarms and other events occur on selected radios (for example, DTMF
commands from radios, Telemetry, Radio State, and other events).
• In the Configuration pane, select SMS Notifications.
• In the SMS Notifications pane, select Enable SMS Service.

• In the SMS Notifications pane, specify the following SMS-related

parameters:

5.17 SMS Notifications 103

  Sender
Leave this box blank.
 Connection to GSM via
From the drop-down list, select the type of connection.
• COM port GSM modem
Select this item if you are using a GSM Modem connected via COM
port. In addition, select the COM port the modem is connected to,
and enter the SIM Card Pin Code.
• Gemalto Cinterion EHS6T LAN
Select this item if you are using a Cinterion EHS6T GSM modem
connected via LAN. In addition, enter the IP address of the modem,
and enter the SIM Card Pin Code.
• Vianett service
Select this item to use an account on Vianett service.
For more details on Vianett service, see www.vianett.com
• SMS Broadcast
Select this item to use an account on SMS Broadcast service.
For more details on SMS Broadcast service, see
www.smsbroadcast.com.au
• Clickatell
Select this item to use an account on Clickatell service.
In addition to the Login and Password, you'll have to specify the
API ID.
For more details on Clickatell service, see www.clickatell.com
• IntelliSoftware
Select this item to use IntelliSoftware SMS Gateway.
For more details on IntelliSoftware SMS service, see
www.intellisoftware.co.uk
 Login
Enter the login for the selected service account.
 Password
Enter the password for the selected service account.
 Send Test MMS
Click this button to send a test MMS from the selected service account
to a recipient's phone number.
Note: This button is available when connected via Vianett
service only.

 Send Test SMS

Click to send a test SMS from Vianett account to recipient phone
number.

104 5 TRBOnet Server

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Note: This button is available when connected via Vianett,

SMS Broadcast, or Clickatell services.

5.18 Push Notifications

TRBOnet Dispatch Console allows sending push notifications to connected
TRBO.SOS applications.
• In the Configuration pane, select Push Notifications.
• In the Push Notifications pane, select Enable Push Service.

• In the Push Notifications pane, specify the following parameters:

 Server
Enter the Ethernet IP address of the push server.
 Port
Enter the UDP port number of the push server.
 Test
Click this button to check the connection to your push server. If the test
is successful, you'll see information on the server you are connected
to.

5.18 Push Notifications 105

 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console
The key features of TRBOnet can be configured by the Administrator in
TRBOnet Dispatch Console after initial installation and configuration.

6.1 Connecting to Server

• Launch TRBOnet Dispatch Console using the desktop or Start menu
shortcut.
• Enter the required connection settings as explained below.
For the default Admin credentials (User Name and Password), consult
our support team.
Note: For security reasons, we strongly recommend that you
change the password for the administrator immediately
after the first login. See section 6.3.4.5, Changing
Password.

Connect to:
 Address
Enter the IP address of the TRBOnet Server to connect to.
Note: This is the Network interface parameter of TRBOnet
Server configured in section 5.4, Network Parameters
(page 17).

 Port
Enter the local port of the TRBOnet Server PC to accept connections
from the Dispatch Console.
Note: This is the Command port parameter of TRBOnet
Server configured in section 5.4, Network Parameters
(page 17).

106 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Authentication:
 Method
From the drop-down list, select the Authentication method:
• TRBOnet Authentication
Select this method to log on as a User registered in the TRBOnet
Dispatch Console Users list.
• Windows Authentication
Select this method to log on using the PC name. The system
automatically shows the PC name as a User Name.
Note: The Windows user must be registered in the TRBOnet
Dispatch Console Users list.

 User Name/Password
Enter the user name and password.
For the default Admin credentials (User Name and Password), consult
our support team.

Note: For security reasons, we strongly recommend that you

change the password for the administrator immediately
after the first login. For this, on the Tools menu, click
Change Password.

• Remember password
Select this option to have the Dispatch Console application remember
your password.
• Connect on startup
Select this option to launch the Dispatch Console application without
having to type the User Name and Password every time. Use this option if
you regularly connect to the same TRBOnet Server and your workstation
is in a secure location.

6.2 Main Window Elements

When the TRBOnet Dispatch Console application is initially launched, the
default Dispatch Console window will be displayed with the Voice Dispatch tab
being active.

6.2 Main Window Elements 107

 The main user interface elements are as follows:
1. Main menu
2. Radio list panel
3. Modules tab panel
4. Radio Interface panel
5. Activity Monitor panel
6. Quick Pane panel
Note: The look of the Dispatch Console windows may have been
customized for your specific operation.

6.3 Main Menu

The TRBOnet Dispatch Console main menu allows the user to manage the main
Dispatch Console options. The main menu is located in the upper left corner of
the main window.

6.3.1 File
The File menu contains the following items:
• File > Connect to TRBOnet Server
Choose this menu item to connect to a different TRBOnet Server, or to
use different credentials for the current connection.
For more details, see section 6.1, Connecting to Server (page 106).
• File > Exit
Choose this menu item to exit TRBOnet Dispatch Console.

6.3.2 View
The View menu contains the following items:

108 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• View > Show Navigation Pane

Choose this menu item to toggle the display of the Navigation pane on
the left of the main window. The Navigation pane includes two panes: the
Radio list pane and the Modules tab panel (see section 6.2, Main Window
Elements).
• View > Show Touch Keyboard Button
Select this menu item to display a Touch Keyboard button on the bottom
of the Modules panel. Clicking this button will bring up a virtual keyboard
on the screen.
• View > Show Modules
Choose this menu item, and in the drop-down menu select/deselect the
modules to display in the Modules tab panel.
• View > Additional Tabs
Choose this menu item, and in the drop-down menu select/deselect the
tabs to display in the Activity Monitor panel.
• View > Configure PTT Boxes
Choose this menu item to configure the view of PTT boxes.

In the Configure PTT Boxes dialog box, specify the following PTT box
parameters:
 Type
In this column, the box type (for example, Channel, Group, Radio or All
Call) is displayed.
Note: The 'Channel' type means that the PTT box has been
automatically created by the radio systems connected
to TRBOnet Server and it can only be partially edited.
The Edit link is grayed out when a PTT box of this type is
selected.

 Name
Enter a name for the selected box. This name will be displayed in the
title of the PTT box.
 View Mode
From the drop-down list, select the view mode:

6.3 Main Menu 109

 • Invisible
Select this mode so that the PTT box will not be displayed.
• Normal
Select this mode so that the PTT box will be displayed in Normal
view mode:

• Minimized
Select this mode so that the PTT box will be displayed in Minimized
view mode:

Note: Hover the mouse pointer over the Minimized PTT box to
view the PTT box in the Normal view mode.

 Available Calls
From the drop-down list, select the destination radio or radio group for
the PTT box.
Create virtual channel boxes
 To create a virtual PTT box, click the Create link in the lower-left corner
of the Configure Voice Boxes dialog box.

110 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

In the Virtual Channel dialog box, specify the following virtual channel
parameters:
 Name
Select this option and enter a name for the virtual channel.
 Choose a Call Type for the channel.
 Call Destination
(available only when Group Call or Private Call is selected as the Call
Type)
Choose Select by Dispatcher to allow the dispatcher to select a Call
Destination.
Or, choose Selected from list and from the list below select the
desired group (if the Group Call type is chosen) or individual radio (if
the Private Call type is chosen).
 Execute call on channels
(available only when All Call or Group Call is selected as the Call Type)
Choose Execute call on all available channels,
or Execute call only on selected channels and in the list below select
the available channels.
• View > Configure Active Calls panel
Choose this menu item to configure call types and advanced settings for
the Active Calls panel. This menu item is available if View > Show Active
Calls Panel is selected.
 Call Types
On this tab, you can select which call types to display in the Active Calls
panel:

 Advanced
On this tab, you can set following options:

6.3 Main Menu 111

 • Show Visible Channels
Select this option to display Visible channels in the Active Calls panel.
• Show Hidden Channels
Select this option to display Hidden channels in the Active Calls
panel.
Note: For the visibility of channels, see Configure PTT boxes,
View Mode.

• Show Requests To Talk

Select this option to display Requests To Talk in the Active Calls
panel.
• Show Missed Calls for
Select this option to display Missed calls in the Active Calls panel,
and specify the duration of displaying Missed Calls, in seconds.

The Active Calls panel is displayed in the upper part of the Dispatch
Console:

112 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• View > Customize Hot Keys

Choose this menu item to configure hot keys for the actions on the
selected channels.

 To configure hotkey PTT actions to the PTT boxes, click the

Show all PTT boxes link, double-click the desired PTT box(es) to apply
the changes, then assign a hotkey or a combination of hotkeys.
 To configure specific non-PTT actions to PTT boxes (for example, mute
channels or set default PTT channels), click the Create link to make the
changes:

6.3 Main Menu 113

 In the Action dialog box that appears, specify the following
parameters:
• Caption
Enter the caption that will be displayed in the Dispatch Console.
• HotKey
Click the Configure button, and on the keyboard, press the key or
key combination you want to assign as a hot key for the selected
action.
• Device button
From the drop-down list, select the external device button you want
to assign for the selected action.
• Action
From the drop-down list, select the desired action:
 Set Select/Unselect channel states
This action sets the Select state to selected PTT boxes and the
Unselect state to others.
 Mute channels
This action mutes selected PTT boxes.
 Unmute channels
This action unmutes selected PTT boxes.
 Set Mute/Unmute channel states
This action sets the Unmute state to selected PTT boxes and the
Mute state to others.
 Terminate All Transmissions
This action terminates all transmissions for selected PTT boxes.
 Configure Channel
This action will configure settings, such as Recorder, Player,
Speaker, etc., for the channel specified below.
 Configure Audio
This action will configure the Audio Settings, such as Recorder
and Player.

114 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Channels
In the list below, select the PTT boxes to which to assign the actions
specified above.
 To enable displaying the configured hot keys in the Dispatch Console,
select the Show actions panel option.
All the hot keys you have configured are displayed in the upper part of the
Dispatch Console:

• View > Add Radio Interface Tab

Choose this menu item to add a new Radio Interface tab to the Radio
Interface pane.

 In the Configure Voice Boxes dialog box, specify the following PTT box
parameters for the new radio interface:
• Name
Enter a name for the radio interface.
Other parameters can be configured in the same way as when
Configuring PTT Boxes.

6.3 Main Menu 115

 The user can switch between Radio Interfaces by clicking on the tab bar in the
upper part of the Radio Interface pane.

• View > Delete Radio Interface Tab

Choose this menu item to delete the Radio Interface tab currently
selected in the Radio Interface pane.
Note: The default Radio Interface tabs can't be deleted.

• View > Show Channel Selector Box

Select this menu item to display a separate PTT box that allows selecting a
channel.

Click the arrow of the drop-down list and select the channel for this PTT
box.
• View > Show Call Type Buttons
Select this menu item to display the Call Type Buttons panel in PTT boxes.

116 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• View > Show Keypad Panel

Select this menu item to display the Keypad panel in PTT boxes.

Note: The Keypad panel will be displayed only when the Num
button is pressed in the Call Type Buttons panel.

• View > Audio Message Library

Choose this menu item to add configured Voice Messages to the Queued
Messages panel. For how to configure Voice Message settings, see Tasks,
Voice Message.

 In the Saved Audio Files dialog box, specify the following parameters:
• Filename
The name of the message displayed in the Queued Messages panel.

6.3 Main Menu 117

 • Description
Enter a description for the Voice Message.
• Severity
From the drop-down list, select the severity level (Information,
Alarm, or Warning).
• Hot Key
Click the Hot Key button and press the key or key combination you
want to assign as a hot key for the selected Voice Message box.
• Visibility
From the drop-down list, select how to display the selected Voice
Message box:
 Hidden
Hide the Voice Message box.
 Button
Display the Voice Message as a button (1).
 Link
Display the Voice Message as a link (2).

• View > Extended PTT boxes

Select this menu item to display PTT boxes as shown:

• View > Large PTT boxes

Select this menu item to display PTT boxes as shown:

118 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• View > Medium PTT boxes

Select this menu item to display PTT boxes as shown:

• View > Small PTT boxes

Select this menu item to display PTT boxes as shown:

• View > Custom PTT boxes >

Select Custom PTT Boxes 1 to display PTT boxes as shown:

Select Custom PTT Boxes 2 to display PTT boxes as shown:

Select Custom PTT Boxes 3 to display PTT boxes as shown:

• View > PTT Box Themes

Click this menu item and select the theme to be edited, or create a new
theme.
To create a new theme:
• Click View > PTT Box Themes > Create Theme.

6.3 Main Menu 119

 • In the PTT Box Theme dialog box, enter a theme name and specify
desired colors for PTT box elements in various states and for various
call types.
• From the Preview list box, select the box size/type and see how it
will look like.
• To set the theme as default, select the Set as default theme option
located at the bottom of the dialog box.
• Click OK.

• View > Show Active Calls Panel

Select this menu item to display the Active Calls panel in the Dispatch
Console.
See also Configuring Active Calls panel.
• View > Show Clock Panel
Select this menu item to display the Clock panel (1) in the Dispatch
Console.
• View > Show Quick Commands Panel
Select this menu item to display the Quick Commands panel (2) in the
Dispatch Console. For more details, see section 6.5.6, Quick Commands.
• View > Show Queued Messages Panel
Select this menu item to display the Queued Messages panel (3) in the
Dispatch Console. For more details, see section 6.5.7, Queued Messages.
• View > Show Patch Panel
Select this menu item to display the Patch panel (4) in the Dispatch
Console. For more details, see section 6.5.5, Patches.
• View > Show Phone Calls Tab
Select this menu item to display the Phone Calls tab (5) in the Radio
Interface pane.
• View > Show Extended Messages Tab
Select this menu item to display the Extended Messages tab (6) in the
Radio Interface pane.

120 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• View > Show Radios Tab

Select this menu item to display the Radios tab (7) in the Radio Interface
pane.

6.3.3 Map
• Select Location Tracking (1) in the Navigation pane to enable Map
Options:
• Click the Map menu (2).

The Map menu contains the following items:

• Map > Select Active Map
Click this menu item to select the map to display in the Dispatch Console.

6.3 Main Menu 121

  Enter the Caption of the map that will be displayed in the Dispatch
Console.
 In the list of Available Maps, choose the map to be displayed.
Adding custom maps
You can also add an online map using its specific URL.
 Click the Add button.

• Enter a Name for the new map.

• Map Type
From the drop-down list, select the map type: Custom Map, WMS
(Web Map Service), or WMTS (Web Map Tile Service)
• Enter the URL of the map service and click Get Capabilities.
As a result, the table in the lower part of the dialog box will get
populated with the available map layers.
• Select the check box in the left column of the table to enable the
appropriate map layer.
• Click OK.
As a result, the new map will appear in the list of available online maps.
• Map > Save Online Map Data
Click this menu item to save your current map region.

In the dialog box, specify the following parameters:

122 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Expire tiles days

Enter the expiration time, in days, for the map tiles. When you
download the map, the already downloaded tiles are checked and if
they are older than this number of days, these map tiles will be re-
downloaded from the Internet.
 Redownload all tiles
Select this option to re-download the map tiles before saving to your
PC.
 Zoom level
Move the slider from left to right to increase the detail level of the
map.
 Show tiles preview
Select this option to show how the map is divided into tiles.
 Show tiles progress
Select this option to show the progress bar while the online map is
being saved.
 Click Start and wait for the system to save the files. This may take
several minutes.
• Map > Map Content
Click this menu item to specify the folder and settings to store the map
data.

In the Online Map dialog box, specify the following settings:

 Cache folder
Click Change and locate the folder on the PC where you wish to store
the map data.
 Update
Select the update interval ('Never', 'Immediately', or 'By period') for
the map data stored in the specified Cache folder.
 Map Type
From the drop-down list, select the map type. For more details on the
maps used in TRBOnet Dispatch Console, see section 6.3.3.1, Map
Types (page 124).
 <Map Provider> key
Enter the key for the selected map.

6.3 Main Menu 123

 Note: To obtain the key, click the hyperlink below and follow
the instructions.

6.3.3.1 Map Types

Online maps:
 MAPNIK – free online map. For more details on OpenStreetMaps, visit
the official the website: http://www.openstreetmap.org
 Thunderforest – commercial online maps. Visit
http://www.thunderforest.com/docs/apikeys/ to get a key.
 Microsoft BING – commercial maps from Microsoft. Includes
BING_ROAD, BING_AREA, and BING_HYBRID subtypes. A user may use
BING maps for 90 days and then they must get a Basic Key. Visit
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ff428642.aspx to get a Basic
Key.
 Google Maps – online mapping service from Google. Visit
https://developers.google.com/maps/documentation/javascript/get-
api-key#key to get a key.
 Custom Maps – online mapping services such as TRBOnet Map Server,
WMS and WMTS services. For more details, refer to TRBOnet Map Server
User Guide. For more details on the WMS/WMTS services, visit
http://www.opengeospatial.org/standards/wms/introduction.
Offline Maps:
 TMap – internal map-making resource. The user can create an offline
copy of online maps for selected regions according to their needs and
requirements. The user can create a map from any picture via the
TRBOnet Map Edit application.
Click Start > All Programs > Neocom Software > TRBOnet PLUS>
Console> TRBOnet.MapEditor.exe
For more details on map calibration, read the following article at:
https://trbonet.com/kb/how-do-i-create-a-custom-map-for-trbonet/
 Beacon 2D – two-dimension offline map for Indoor positioning. The
user can create indoor maps using the Indoor 2D Map Converter. See
section 6.4.21.2, Indoor 2D Map Converter.
 Beacon 3D – three-dimension map for Indoor positioning. The user
can use any DirectX file as a map.
• Map > Print
Click this menu item to print the map region currently displayed in the
Map pane.
• Map > Geocoding
Click this menu item to configure geocoding servers in the Dispatch
Console.

124 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Load data from TRBOnet Server if Geocoding services are

inaccessible from local PC
Select this option to receive location data from the TRBOnet Server PC
if the Dispatch Console is unable to resolve location data.
 For other settings, see section 5.8.1.1, Configuring Geocoding Servers
(page 27).
• Map > Open New Map in Tab
Click this menu item to add a new map tab to the Map pane.

 Map Type
From the drop-down list, select the map type.
 Caption
Enter a caption for the new map tab.
 For other settings, see Selecting Active Map.
Once you have clicked OK, the new tab will appear in the Map pane:

• Map > Open New Map in Window

Click this menu item to create a new map window with the specified map.
 For required settings, see Selecting Active Map

6.3 Main Menu 125

 Once you have clicked OK, the new Map window will appear:

• Map > Google Earth

Click this menu item to open the Google Earth application.
Note: Google Earth must be previously installed on the PC. To
download Google Earth, go to the Google Earth website
https://www.google.com/intl/en/earth/desktop/, and
click Download.

• Map > Delete Routes on Google Earth

Click this menu item delete all routes from Google Earth.
• Map > Show Radios on Google Earth
Click this menu item and in the drop-down menu select which radios to
display on Google Earth.

6.3.4 Tools
The Tools menu contains the following items:
• Tools > Event Viewer in Window
Click this menu item to open the Event Viewer in a new window.

• Tools > Recent Calls/Events in Window

Click this menu item to open Recent Calls/Events in a new window.

126 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Click Playback to play back the selected call.

 Click Save to save the selected call as an audio file.
In the Save As dialog box, locate the folder where you want to save the
audio file, specify the file name, and from the drop-down 'Save as type'
list, select the format (*.wav, *.tna, or *.ogg) for the audio file.
 Click Add Note to add a note to the selected event.

• Enter the text of the note in the text box.

• You can extend the form of a note by clicking the Add Extension
link and adding new fields and their possible values to the form.
• Tools > Job Ticketing Monitoring
Click this menu item to open the window that visually represents the job
tickets created by dispatchers and assigned to radios.

In this window, you can perform the following actions:

 Select a time period for which to display Job Ticketing data.

6.3 Main Menu 127

  Monitor tickets created by dispatchers.
 Monitor tickets assigned to radios.
All data are shown in the form of status diagrams.
• Tools > Radios in Window
Click this menu item to open a new window that displays the radios
present in the system.

In this window, you can make radio calls, send text messages. In addition,
you can select to display radios by groups and states.
• Tools > Phone Calls in Window
Click this menu item to open a new window that displays Phone Calls
available in the system.

In this window, you can make and receive phone calls. To make a call,
enter a phone number in the dial string and click Call. You can also select
a contact from the Contacts list. Or, use the shortcut buttons you have
previously created for your contacts (Tools > Contacts).
• Tools > Telemetry Monitoring
Click this menu item to open the window that displays configured
telemetry profiles for the radios.

128 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 From the Show drop-down list, select the Telemetry profile to display.
See also section 6.4.12, Telemetry (page 225).
• Tools > Text Messages in Window
Click this menu item to open a new window to manage text messages.

In this window, you can perform the following tasks:

 View sent messages in the upper-right pane.
 Select online dispatchers and radio groups in the left pane, or by
clicking the ellipsis (…) button in the lower-right pane.
 Type messages in the text box in the lower-right pane.
 Send messages by clicking the Send button in the lower-right pane.
• Tools > Routes in Window
Click this menu item to open a new window to manage routes.
For more details on Route Management configuration,
see section 6.8, Guard Tour / Route Management (page 342).
• Tools > Camera in Window
Click this menu item to open a new window with an IP camera view.

In this window, the IP camera view is displayed.

 Camera
From the drop-down list, select a camera that is connected to TRBOnet
Dispatch Console.

6.3 Main Menu 129

 See also section 6.4.9, IP Cameras (page 218).
• Tools > Reset All Location Triggers
Choose this menu item to stop/start location triggers on all radios.
• Tools > Dynamic Regrouping
Click this menu item to dynamically regroup radios depending on current
needs. For more details, see section 6.4.31.2, Dynamic Regrouping.
Note: The Dynamic Regrouping feature is available only for
Capacity MAX systems. In addition, the radio's firmware
version must be 2.10 or later, and the DGNA feature
must be enabled on the radios.

• Tools > Terminate All Transmissions

Click this menu item to terminate all voice sessions.
This action is a "hard" request to stop all "hung" transmissions in the
TRBOnet software. If a radio communication session is not allowed to be
interrupted on a repeater or base station, it will only be stopped for the
TRBOnet software.
• Tools > Contacts
Click this menu item to open the Contacts list for reference purposes as
well as for creating favorites and shortcut buttons.

Creating favorites
• In the right pane, click the grey star on the right of the contact's
name until it turns yellow.
Creating shortcut buttons
• Click the Favorites tab.

130 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the right pane, click the circle to on the right of the contact's
name and from the menu that opens select the desired button
color.
The shortcut buttons you have created will appear in the Phone Calls
window (Tools > Phone Calls in Window).
6.3.4.1 Options
• On the Tools menu, click Options.

Sound
• In the Options dialog box, click the Sound tab.
• Use Sound Notifications
Select this option to enable sound notifications in the Dispatch
Console.
• Select the event in the list and specify the sound.
• From the Sound drop-down list, select ether 'Sound by default' to
play default sound, or 'Disabled' to disable sound notification for
the event.

• Click to listen to the sound notification for the selected event.

6.3 Main Menu 131

 • Click Select and browse for the audio file on your PC.
 Alarm of Emergency Call duration
Enter the time value, in seconds, for the duration of the alarm tone
when an emergency call is received.
Map
• In the Options dialog box, click the Map tab.

• Map refresh interval

Enter the time period, in seconds, to update map data.
• Show the directions of motion
Select this option to display a direction of motion for map objects.
• Show names of objects
Select this option to display object names on the map.
• Hide overlapping names of objects
Select this option to hide overlapping object names.
• Show PTT on map
Select this option to allow the dispatcher to make private calls by
clicking a corresponding radio icon on the map.
• Default Map Filter
Select/deselect the icons for the default map filter (for a description
of the icons, see section 6.6.2.4, Filters).
• Show coordinates on map
In the drop-down list, select the coordinate systems/units that will
be used to display coordinates in the lower-right corner of the Map
pane.
• Select the image size
From the drop-down list, select the size of a radio icon.
• Select the default image type
From the drop-down list, select the default image type of a radio
icon.

132 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Path to Google Earth exe file

Click the ellipsis (…) button and specify the location of the Google
Earth exe file on your PC. For example, the path may look like:
C:\Program Files\Google\Google Earth Pro\client\googleearth.exe
Coverage Map
TRBOnet Dispatch Console allows displaying RSSI levels on a map. The RSSI is a
received signal strength indicator. It measures the power level of the RX signal
at a repeater's receiver. The RSSI maps can be used by radio system engineers
to plan further extension of their radio networks.
• In the Options dialog box, click the Coverage Map tab.

 Draw in Dots
For a more detailed data view, choose this option to display on the
map, dots of RSSI levels representing coordinate points.

 Draw Coverage Zone

For a less detailed view, choose this option to configure and display on
the map, RSSI zones of average RSSI levels using GPS coordinates.

6.3 Main Menu 133

 • RSSI Zone Size
Enter the size of the RSSI zone within which RSSI levels will be
averaged.

 Click Add to add a new RSSI level.

• Value
Enter the minimum level for the signal range (for example, -65
means -65 and higher).
• Description
Enter the name of the RSSI level to display in the system.
• Color
Pick a color for the RSSI indicator on the map.
To view RSSI Levels on the map, click the Location Tracking tab in the
Navigation pane, and on the Map pane toolbar, click Coverage Map.
Then set the Start Date and End Date to display RSSI data.
Hardware
• In the Options dialog box, click the Hardware tab.

 Use signaling device

Select this option to use an external signaling device.

134 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Serial port
From the drop-down list, select the COM port the signaling device is
connected to.
 Click Configure and specify the duration of a signal and which call
types to include in signaling.

The External Devices table displays the connected devices

(Type/Name/Description).
• Click the Add link, and from the pull-down menu select the type of
TRBOnet device with a PTT button connected to the PC (Microphone
Adapter, Media Dock, or Footswitch), or the device type (HID,
DirectX, TIPRO, or COM).
• In the dialog box that opens, specify the desired device parameters
and click OK.
• First VoIP port
Enter the number of the first VoIP port for audio communications
(4022, by default). Each additional Dispatch Console will create a
connection on the next port number.
• First IP Camera port
Enter the number of the first IP Camera port for video
communications (13152, by default). Each additional Dispatch
Console will create a connection on the next port number.
• Use proxy server
Select this option to enable a Proxy Server service in TRBOnet
Dispatch Console to access the Internet.
A proxy server can be used when a user's computer cannot be
connected directly to the Internet, but there is another computer
with Internet access in the network.
 Click the Configure link to specify the alternative server settings.

6.3 Main Menu 135

 Advanced
• In the Options dialog box, click the Advanced tab.

Configuration Scope
 Per machine
Choose this option to store settings in a common place for all
dispatchers of the Dispatch Console.
 Per user
Choose this option to store settings for each dispatcher separately if
they are using different Windows user accounts.
PTT Options
 Tone and PTT when using external PTT device
Select this option to enable Alert Tone for all subscribers on a channel
when the dispatcher presses the PTT button on an external PTT device.
 Use Record Mode with external PTT device
Select this option to record all voice transmissions from external PTT
devices (Palm mics, Footswitches, and other devices).
 Suggest Queued Message when channel is busy or radio is offline
Select this option to record a Queued Voice Message when a radio
channel is busy or radio is offline.

136 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Enable sticky PTT

Select this option to start and finish voice calls by a short press of the
PTT rather than holding the PTT down until the end of a voice call.
 Use 'Space' key to press PTT
Select this option to use a hot key for the PTT. Click the Configure link,
and on the keyboard, press the key you want to assign as a hot key for
the PTT button.
 Enable Single PTT Select mode
Select this option so that only one PTT box can be selected at a time,
that is you can't have multiple selected PTT boxes.
Voice Options
 Mute other dispatchers
Select this option to mute all other dispatchers voice transmissions.
 Mute radio-to-radio private calls
Select this option to mute all private calls on the channel.
 Mute all channels when transmitting audio or recording a voice
message
Select this option to mute other channels when the dispatcher
transmits audio or records a voice message.
 Mute the tone when receiving a Tone and PTT call
Select this option to mute the tone when you receive a Tone and PTT
call.
 Play a sound when starting a Tone and PTT call
Select this option to play the tone when you start a Tone and PTT call.
 Automatically set channel to Solo when transmitting audio
Select this option to mute other channels when transmitting audio.
 Automatically unmute channel when transmitting audio
Select this option to automatically unmute a channel when
transmitting through this channel.
View Options
 Customize the automatic radio name pattern
Select this option and click the Configure link to set a custom alias for
a radio in the list of radios. Once the changes are made, selecting this
check box will cause a change to the radios in the Radio list pane
(upper left pane of the Main Interface screen).

6.3 Main Menu 137

 • Radio display name
Click the ellipsis (…) button and in the Format dialog box pick the
fields to display for a radio.

• Allocated radio display name

Click the ellipsis (…) button and in the Format dialog box pick the
fields to display for an allocated (taken) radio.
• Allocated radio display name
(the owner has more than one radio)
Click the ellipsis (…) button and in the Format dialog box pick the
fields to display for an allocated (taken) radio in case when a user
has more than one radio.
• Click Defaults to set default settings for radio display.
 Show extended notes
Select this option to enable Extended Notes in the Dispatch Console.
The Extended Notes feature is intended to add predefined Extended
Notes templates, the same as for Extended Messages, for the selected
calls and events.
For example, a Taxi Dispatcher needs to check clients' call response
period for the company internal monitoring of the employees. They
can add a predefined template and check the time period. All Extended
Notes are displayed in the Ext. Note column in the Recent
Calls/Events tab:

138 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Click the Extended Notes button (1) to fill the template;

Click the View button (2) to see the Extended Note.
 Show latest note in Unit information details
Select this option to show the radio status in the Radio information
tooltip (see section 6.5.1.3, Radio Information Tooltip).
 Show confirmation dialogs
Select this option to enable confirmation dialogs for dispatcher actions.
For example, when sending a configured Voice Message from the
Dispatch Console, the following confirmation dialog box will appear:

 Show incoming text messages in a pop-up window

Select this option so that incoming Text Messages will pop up over the
application window.

 Close button minimizes application

Select this option so that clicking the Close button will minimize the
Dispatch Console rather than close it.
 Minimize button minimizes to Voice Bar
Select this option so that when you click the Minimize button you will
see only the Voice Bar displayed at the top of the PC's screen.

6.3 Main Menu 139

  Show this number of Recent Calls/Events
Enter the number of items to display in the Recent calls/Events pane.
 Measurement system
From the drop-down list, select either the Metric or the US unit system.
 Coordinate system
From the drop-down list, select the coordinate system to be used.
Audio
• In the Options dialog box, click the Audio tab.

Default audio devices

 Recorder
From the drop-down list, select the recording device the microphone is
connected to.
 Player
From the drop-down list, select the audio device to play incoming voice
messages and playback voice recordings in the Dispatch Console.
Note: If TRBOnet Dispatch Console is running on the same PC
with TRBOnet Server connected to control stations via a
programming cable and sound card, the playback and
recorder devices cannot be the same for TRBOnet
Dispatch Console and TRBOnet Server.

In the list below, you can configure audio settings for specific channels by
expanding the corresponding items (Selected channel, Unselected
channel, Intercom, etc.)
The configurable audio settings are as follows: Recorder, Player, Speaker,
Volume level, External PTT, Indicator, and Theme.
Alarm
• In the Options dialog box, click the Alarm tab.

140 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Alarm Panel
From the drop-down list, select where to show the alarm panel (in the
main window or in a new window), or select 'None' to hide it.
 Call Button
From the drop-down list, select the call destination when the PTT
button is pressed in the alarm panel (private call, group call, or all call).

 Always show radio on map

Select this option so that radios in alarm mode will always be displayed
on the map regardless of the filters applied to the radio (see section
6.6.2.4, Filters).
Note: When this option is selected, you cannot disable the
display of radios in alarm mode.

 Display camera in new window

Select this option so that when a radio is in alarm mode, a window will
open with the camera associated with the radio.

6.3 Main Menu 141

  Display radio in new window
Select this option to display a radio in alarm mode on the selected map
in a new, separate window.
• Map
This field displays the map name. Click the Select map link and
specify the map on which to display a radio in alarm mode.

Phone Calls
• In the Options dialog box, click the Phone Calls tab.

 Queue all incoming phone calls

Select this option so that when the phone line is busy, incoming calls
will be queued rather than rejected.
 Show this number of Recent Phone Calls
Enter the number of items to display in the list of recent calls. The list
of recent phone calls appears when you click the arrow on the right of
the dial string in the Contact Dialer box (see section 6.5.9.1, Phone Calls
from/to Dispatch Console).

142 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Ringtone configuration
On the Incoming Call (Call Waiting) tab:
• Click a corresponding link in the Ringtone column, and from the
pull-down menu, select either Set Default, Set Custom, or Disable.
If you select Custom, in the dialog box that opens, browse for the
audio file on the local PC and click Open.
• Click a Play link in the Action column to play back the
corresponding ringtone.
On the Held Call tab:
• Remind after
Enter the timeout, in seconds, that will be used for playing the
reminder tone when a call is on Hold.
• Ringtone
Specify the reminder tone to be played when a call is on Hold.
6.3.4.2 Exporting/Importing Options
A dispatcher can export custom Dispatch Console settings (Volume level, UI
view, hotkeys configuration, and other settings) as a .config file and save it to
the local PC or to a selected external device.
• Click Tools > Export Options and save the file to the specified location.
If you want to apply settings from a different TRBOnet Dispatch Console:
• Click Tools > Import Options and browse for the .config file with the
desired settings.

6.3.4.3 Exporting/Importing Objects

A dispatcher can export/import various types of objects, such as beacons, IP
cameras, map objects, maps regions, map routes, phone contacts, radio users,
and radios.
To export objects:
• Click Tools > Export Objects.
In the dialog box that opens, enter the following information:

 Objects
From the drop-down list, select the type of objects you want to export.

6.3 Main Menu 143

  In the table below, select/deselect the desired records.
 Click Export, and in the Save As dialog box, locate the folder where
you want to save the file, type a filename, and click Save.
To import objects:
• Click Tools > Import Objects.
In the dialog box that opens, enter the following information:

 Objects
From the drop-down list, select the type of objects you want to import.
 In the table below, in the right column, enter/change the column
names that would correspond to the database field names.
 Passwords encrypted
Select this option if the passwords are kept encrypted in the data being
imported.
 Click Import, and in the Open dialog box, locate the desired file and
click Open.

6.3.4.4 Setting Language

• On the Tools menu, click Set Language

 From the drop-down list, select the desired language and click OK.
The changes will apply after you restart the Dispatch Console.

6.3.4.5 Changing Password

• On the Tools menu, click Change Password

144 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 In the Old password box, enter your current password.

 In the New password box, enter the new password.
 In the Repeat password box, enter the new password again.
 Click OK.

6.3.5 Help
• Help > Send Feedback
Click this menu item to send your feedback to Neocom Software, either
through E-mail, or online via the site.
• Help > Save System Logs
Click this menu item to save the logs as a .zip file. This .zip file can then be
sent to Neocom support.
• Help > About
Click this menu item to see the About dialog displaying information about
TRBOnet PLUS (applied license, version, build date, and other relevant
information).

6.3 Main Menu 145

 6.4 Administration
This section describes how to configure the most important settings of
TRBOnet PLUS.
• Click the Administration tab (1), and see the full system information in
the Server (2) pane:

6.4.1 Database
• Go to Administration (1), Database (2) to see the full overview of the
database:

In the Database pane, the administrator can restore and back up the
database and audio recordings.
For more details on backups, see Appendix A: Backing up and Restoring
Database and Audio Recordings (page 382).

146 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.4.2 Systems
All radio systems registered in the Server are represented in the Systems pane.
In addition to radio systems, the following systems can also be present in the
Systems pane: Intercom, Phone Connect, PoC, and Public Announcement
systems.
• Go to Administration (1), Systems (2) to see the system parameters:

The administrator is able to see the following system parameters in the table:
• System Type – the type of the system.
• System ID – a unique System Identifier configured in TRBOnet Server
configuration for repeater or control stations in the system.
• Caption – the caption of the system.

6.4.2.1 System Properties

To see the radio system properties, do the following:
• Select a radio system in the list and click the Properties button (1);
or,
double-click the radio system in the list;
or,
click the corresponding element at the bottom of the Dispatch Console
window, and choose Properties (2).

6.4 Administration 147

 The administrator is able to see Active and Inactive registered systems. In case
you have more than 10 registered systems, systems are grouped and can be
seen in the drop-down list.
Common information for all system elements is listed below:
Description tab
On the Description tab, you can see the general info:

• System Type
The system type for a repeater/control station (in Digital or Analogue
mode).
For more details on the systems, see section 3.2, MOTOTRBO Radio
Systems (page 4).
• System ID
The Unique System Identifier configured in TRBOnet Server for a repeater
or control stations in the system.
• Caption
Enter the system name.

148 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Channels tab
On the Channels tab, you see the list of channels:

• Click the Properties button to see the channel additional data:

 ID
Default registration number (manufacturer’s number);
 Name
System element’s name in the system;
 Type
System type for a repeater/control station (in Digital or Analogue
mode).
 Mode
System type for a repeater/connection mode for a control station.
For details on the control station modes, see section 5.9.5.1, Control
Station Connection Modes (page 48).
 Connected
• Serial number
Default system element’s serial number (manufacturer’s number).

6.4 Administration 149

 • Firmware Version
Current system element’s firmware version.
• Click the Reset button to test the connection to the system element.
Note: For a repeater, clicking the Reset button reconnects the
repeater.
For a control station, clicking the Reset button reloads
the radio.

Talk groups tab (for repeaters only)

 On the Talk groups tab, you can see selected Talk group info:

 Specify available Talk groups for the system element in the list of
created Talk groups.
Selected Talk groups are available on the Radio tab in the system
element box in the drop-down list:

Note: Close TRBOnet Server before applying the system

element settings.

Volume tab (for repeaters only)

 On the Volume tab, you can see Volume settings for the repeater:

150 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Specify the RX and TX volume levels for the Repeater using a

volume control slider.
• Click the Reset link to set default volume level for RX or TX.
• Configure system volume
Select this option to save default volume settings for Voice
transmissions from the selected Repeater.
Extras tab
• On the Extras tab, you can see the information about audio and data
transmissions:

 Enable Voice Recording

Select this option to enable Voice Recording for the selected repeater.
 Use DTMF commands to mute and unmute incoming audio traffic
from the channel in consoles
Select this option to use certain DTMF commands that can be sent to
the channel so that the channel will be muted/unmuted in active
consoles.
• Mute
Enter the DTMF sequence that will be sent to the channel to mute
the channel in active consoles.

6.4 Administration 151

 • Unmute
Enter the DTMF sequence that will be to the channel to unmute the
channel in active consoles.

6.4.2.2 Intercom Properties

• Select Intercom in the list and click the Properties button;
or,
double-click Intercom in the list of radio systems.
Channels tab
On the Channels tab, you see the list of Intercom channels.
These are the dispatcher groups you added in TRBOnet Dispatch Console
(see section 6.4.24, Dispatcher Groups).
Transmits tab

 Record Audio
Select this option to record all audio transmissions over the Intercom
channel.
Voice Call Hang Time (ms):
 Group Call
This value sets the duration of reserving the channel after the end of a
group call transmission. During this time, only members of the
dispatcher group that the channel is reserved for can transmit.
 Private Call
This value sets the duration during which the private dispatcher call
setup is kept after a dispatcher releases the PTT button. This is to avoid
setting up the call again each time a dispatcher presses the PTT button
to transmit. During this time, other dispatchers can still transmit since
the channel is essentially idle.

152 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 TX Timeout
Enter the time, in seconds, to be used as a voice session limit. When
the dispatcher starts a voice session over the Intercom channel,
transmission will be interrupted after this TX Timeout expires.

6.4.3 System Bridge

TRBOnet Dispatch Console provides the System Bridge function that allows
configuring the network for redirecting radio calls.
The administrator can create the following two types of system bridges:
1. System Bridge for Radio Channels – allows connecting all types of
Radios (analogue and digital radios, supports IP Site Connect, Capacity
Plus, Linked Capacity Plus and Connect Plus modes). See section 6.4.3.1,
Radio Bridge.
2. System Bridge for Repeaters (Binary Patch) - allows connecting only
the repeater slots between IP Site Connect systems without
encoding/decoding voice and data. See section 6.4.3.2, Binary Patch.
To add a system bridge:
• Go to Administration (1), System Bridge (2).

• Click the Add button, and from the drop-down menu, select the System
Bridge type (3).

6.4 Administration 153

 6.4.3.1 Radio Bridge

• On the Channels tab, specify the following bridge parameters:

 Name
Specify a name for the Radio Bridge to display in the Radio Interface
pane.
 Bridge Mode
Select the mode from the drop-down list. For more details on System
Bridge types, see Radio Bridge Types (page 156).
 PTT Button
From the drop-down list, select how to display the PTT button in the
System Bridge box. There are 3 options available:
• Enabled when Bridge is activated
• Always Enabled
• Invisible
 On the Channels tab, click the Add button (1) to add a channel to the
list.
 In the Radio System column, select a radio channel from the drop-
down list (2).
 In the Group column, select available group for the radio channel (3).
 In the Mode column, select a mode for the radio channel (4).
• Always
Enables the System Bridge always, regardless of the radio state
(online/offline).
• By Radio
Enables the System Bridge on a selected channel when there are
online radios capable to receive voice calls from the selected group.
• On the Parameters tab, specify call types for the System Bridge:

154 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Select call types to use in System Bridge mode.

 Click OK to add a System Bridge for the radio channels.
• On the Initialization tab, specify how the bridge will be initialized:

 Call from dispatcher

Select this option and from the Dispatcher drop-down list, select the
desired dispatcher.
 Call from other bridge
Select this option and from the Bridge drop-down list, select the
desired bridge.
 Call from radio
Select this option and from the Radio drop-down list, select the desired
radio(s).
The System Bridge boxes are displayed on the Patch panel of the Radio
Interface pane:

6.4 Administration 155

 Radio Bridge Types
1. Channels redirect the calls to each other
This is the most common type of System Bridge when data exchanges
between the channels set in the System Bridge settings. Thus, there is a
common channel for all the radios of the specified control stations:
To create this type of System Bridge, add a System Bridge and set the
Work Mode as Channels redirect calls to each other.

Voice Call via System Bridging

Analogue MOTOTRBO
Radio Capacity Plus
network
Analogue Capacity Plus
Control Station Control Station
Voice Call via System
Voice Call via System

TRBOnet
Bridging
Bridging

System
Bridging

Digital IP Site Connect

Control Station Control Station

Voice Call via System Bridging MOTOTRBO IP

Digital Radio
Site Connect
network

2. Channel redirects calls to multiple channels

Voice Call via System Bridging

Radio network
2

Control Station

TRBOnet
System
Bridging
Radio network Control Station
1

Voice Call via System Bridging

Control Station

Radio network
N

156 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

To create this type of System Bridge, add a System Bridge and set the
Work Mode as Channel redirects calls to multiple channels.
3. Multiple channels redirect calls to one channel

Voice Call via System Bridging

Radio network
2

Control Station

TRBOnet
System
Bridging
Control Station Radio network
1

Control Station

Voice Call via System Bridging

Radio network
N

To create this type of System Bridge, add a System Bridge and set the
Work Mode as Multiple channels redirect calls to one channel.
4. Redirect private calls
Select this mode so that private calls can be redirected between radio
systems.
5. Redirect private calls to group calls
Select this mode so that private calls will be redirected to group calls
within one radio system or between radio systems.

6.4.3.2 Binary Patch

• Name
Specify a name for the Binary Patch to display in the Radio Interface pane.
• Rules
Specify the rules for redirecting calls between IPSC systems. Click the Add
link below to add a rule.
 Slot
From the drop-down list, select the slot (Slot 1 or Slot 2) of the IPSC
systems being connected.
 Select the type of data: Voice and/or Data.
 Select the call types: All Calls, Private Calls, and/or Group Calls.
 Groups
In the drop-down list, select the group(s).

6.4 Administration 157

  Repeaters
In the drop-down list, select the IPSC systems to be connected via the
selected slot.
The Binary Patch boxes are displayed on the Patch panel of the Radio Interface
pane:

Note: System Bridges can also be created by drag and drop of

the PTT boxes in the Radio Interface pane. It is a
temporary System Bridge, which will be deleted after
reconnecting to TRBOnet Server or exiting TRBOnet
Dispatch Console.

6.4.4 Phone Calls

This section describes how to configure the Phone Connect system in TRBOnet
Dispatch Console.
• Go to Administration (1), Phone Calls (2).
• In the Phone Calls pane, click the Configuration tab (3).

158 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.4.4.1 Radio Call Configuration

• Click the Configure button (4) to set radio call configuration parameters:

• Access Code
Set the value to that configured for the radios as Access Code in
MOTOTRBO CPS (see Appendix B: SIP Setup for Motorola Phone System,
section Programming Radios).
• Deaccess Code
Set the value to that configured for the radios as Deaccess Code in
MOTOTRBO CPS (see Appendix B: SIP Setup for Motorola Phone System,
section Programming Radios).

6.4 Administration 159

 Callback Request Options
• Allow radio users to make outgoing calls
Select this option to enable outgoing phone calls from the radios.
• Send a DTMF command to request a callback
Select this option to allow radio users to dial the phone number as a
sequence of DTMF tones sent over the radio channel.
• Send a text message to request a callback
Select this option to allow radio users to initiate phone calls via sending
TMS messages with a specified prefix to the dispatcher.
 Use this prefix in text messages
Enter the specific prefix for a text message.
• Start transmission
Select the mode for starting transmission on the radio that initiates a call.
 Wait for answer
Transmission will be started as soon as the called party answers the
call.
 Immediately
Transmission will be started immediately that is without waiting for the
called party to answer the call.
Calls to Radios and PoC Devices
• Start transmission
Select the option how to start transmission on the radio receiving a
phone call.
 Immediately
Select to start the call immediately.
 Wait for PTT
Select to play a ringtone until the radio user presses the PTT.
• Max ring time
Specify a timeout that defines how long to attempt to connect to the
radio.
• Check if the radio is available before making a call
If this option is selected, a Radio Check command will be executed before
placing a call. Select this option if the Use NAI Data (MNIS and DDMS)
option is not selected in the Repeater pane (see section 5.9.2, Adding a
MOTOTRBO Repeater).
• Call notifications
Select this option to send a text message to the radio when the channel is
busy and a phone call cannot be established.
• Play a tone phone when PTT is pressed or released
Select this option so that a tone will be played during the established
phone call when PTT is pressed or released on the remote radio that
doesn't support a Full-Duplex mode.

160 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.4.4.2 Inbound Call Configuration

• Click the Configure button (5) to set inbound call configuration
parameters:

Inbound Call Control

• Call to Dispatch Center
Select the mode for handling incoming calls made to the Dispatch Center.
 Reject
All incoming phone calls will be declined.
 Forward to IVR
When an incoming call arrives, the phone user will hear Voice Menu
commands.
 Redirect to online dispatchers
All incoming voice calls will be redirected to all dispatchers of the
Dispatch center and any available dispatcher will answer the phone
call.
 Use as a regular phone number
A call to the Dispatch Center's number will be processed as a call to a
regular phone number, and will depend on the selection made in the
parameter below.
• Call to unregistered number
Select the mode for handling incoming calls made to unregistered
numbers.
 Reject
Select this option to decline all phone calls to unregistered subscribers.
 Use this number as Radio ID
Select this option so that the system will use unregistered numbers as
a Radio ID and start a Private Call.

6.4 Administration 161

  Use this number as Internal Phone Number
Select this option to allow the system to read unregistered numbers
according to Voice Menu rules.
 Forward call to PABX
Select this option to forward all calls to unregistered numbers to the
External PBX.
Interactive Voice Response (IVR) Options
• Do not wait for Accept code if one of the fixed numbers below is
dialed
Select this option to search for the fixed number in the Extensions table
automatically.
When this option is disabled, the subscriber must dial the number
according to the following example: (phone number)#. The character #
(or *, if selected as the Accept code) is used to search for the phone
number in the table.
• Maximum number of digits
Specify the maximum number of characters allowed in a phone number.
• Accept Code
Specify the character that will be used to finish dialing the extension
number.
All available numbers are listed in the table below.
• Click the Add link to add a number to the table.
To add a static (fixed) number
 Choose Static number.

 Number
Enter a phone number to add to the table (contact list).
 Call Type
Select the call type from the drop-down list.
• Call Dispatcher
Select this type to make a phone call to the dispatcher.
• Call Radio
Select this type to make a phone call to the selected radio.

162 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Call Group
Select this type to make a phone call to the selected group.
 Channel
Select the channel to make a group phone call through (available for
Group Calls only).
 Dispatcher/Radio/Group
Select the dispatcher, radio, or group depending on what you have
selected in the Call Type box.
To add a dynamic number
 Choose Dynamic number.

 Prefix
Specify a prefix to type in on the keyboard.
 Call Type
Select the call type from the drop-down list.
• Call Radio
Select this type to make a phone call to a radio.
• Call Group
Select this type to make a phone call to a group.
• Call Phone
Select this type to make a phone call to a phone number.
 Channel
Select the channel to make a group phone call through (available for
Group Calls only).

6.4.4.3 Conference Configuration

• Click the Configure button (6) to set conference parameters:

6.4 Administration 163

  Max Call Duration
Enter the maximum time allowed for the conference, in minutes.
 Automatic Voice Detection
Select this option to enable automatic voice detection during a
conference call.
 Automatic Gain Control
Select this option to enable automatic gain control during a conference
call. In the list on the right, select the desired gain level, in dB.
 Automatic Noise Reduction
Select this option to enable automatic noise reduction during a
conference call.
6.4.4.4 Voice Message Loop Settings
• Click the Configure button (7) to configure Voice Message Loop Settings:
Note: These settings apply if the Voice Message task is
enabled or the Voice Message or Text to Speech actions
are selected in an Alarm Management rule.

 Play intro message

Select this option to play an introduction message before playing the
voice message itself.
 Play voice message this many times
Specify how many times to play the voice message.

164 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Set delay between voice messages

Select this option to set a delay between repeated voice messages.
6.4.4.5 Adding Extensions
• Go to Administration (1), Phone Calls (2).
• In the Phone Calls pane, click the Extensions tab (3), and then Add (4).

In the Phone User dialog box, specify the following parameters:

 User Extension
Enter the extension number that will be used by the phone user.
 User Name
Enter the user name that will be used by the phone user.
 User Password
Enter the password for the phone user to be authenticated by the
phone system.
 Password (repeat)
Enter the password again.
 Fist Name/Last Name/Display Name
Enter the first, last and display names of the phone user.
• In addition, on the Logical Groups tab, specify logical groups for the
phone user. For more information about logical groups, see section
6.4.29, Logical Groups.
• On the Custom Fields tab, specify the desired values for the custom
fields. For more information about custom fields, see section 6.4.6,
Custom Fields).

6.4.4.6 Call Redirection

If a dispatcher doesn’t take a phone call within the set period or they have
changed their status to unavailable, the call is automatically forwarded to a

6.4 Administration 165

 specified dispatcher, radio, radio group, or phone account. This can be useful
during night shifts when no dispatcher is available.
• Click Administration (1), Phone Calls (2), Call Redirection (3), Add (4).

In the Redirect Call dialog box, specify the following parameters:

Call to
 Destination
From the drop-down list, select the dispatcher or dispatcher group.
 Timeout
Specify the time period, in seconds, defining how long to wait until the
dispatcher answers a call.
Redirect to
 Type
From the drop-down list, select one of the following:
• Decline
The calls will be declined.
• Dispatcher
The calls will be redirected to a specified dispatcher or dispatcher
group.
• Radio unit
The calls will be redirected to a specified radio.
• Radio Group
The calls will be redirected to a specified radio group.
• Phone account
The calls will be redirected to a phone account from the phone
book.

166 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Radio System
If a radio group is selected as the redirection destination, select the
radio system over which to make a call to the specified radio group.
 Destination
From the drop-down list, select a particular dispatcher/dispatcher
group, radio, radio group, or phone account, depending on what you
have selected in the Type field.
 Priority
If a radio or radio group is selected as the redirection destination,
select the priority with which the call will be made over the radio
system.

6.4.4.7 Phone Contacts

In addition to SIP extensions, the phone contacts can also be used in your
Phone Connect system.
• Go to Administration (1), Phone Calls (2).
• In the Phone Calls pane, click the Phone Contacts tab (3), and then Add
(4).

In the Phone Contact dialog box, specify the following parameters:

 User Extension
Enter the extension number for the phone contact.
 User Name
Enter the user name for the phone contact.
 Fist Name/Last Name/Display Name
Enter the first, last and display names of the phone contact.
 In addition, on the Logical Groups tab, specify logical groups for the
phone contact. For more information about logical groups, see section
6.4.29, Logical Groups.

6.4 Administration 167

  On the Custom Fields tab, specify the desired values for the custom
fields. For more information about custom fields, see section 6.4.6,
Custom Fields).

6.4.4.8 Dial Plans

In order to restrict incoming and outgoing calls as well as set priority for calls,
dial plans can be used in your Phone Connect system.
• Go to Administration (1), Phone Calls (2).
• In the Phone Calls pane, click the Dial Plans tab (3), and then Add (4).

In the Dial Plan dialog box, specify the following parameters:

 Name
Enter a name for the dial plan.
 Description
Enter a description for the dial plan.
 Apply to Incoming Calls (Caller number)
Select this check box to apply the dial plan to incoming calls from the
numbers specified in the patterns.
 Apply to Incoming Calls (Destination number)
Select this check box to apply the dial plan to incoming calls to the
numbers specified in the patterns.
 Apply to Outgoing Calls (Destination number)
Select this check box to apply the dial plan to outgoing calls to the
numbers specified in the patterns.
• Click the Patterns tab.

168 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Specify the pattern that will be used to match the numbers in the dial
string or the incoming call numbers.
 Call Priority
From the drop-down list, specify the priority for the calls
corresponding to the specified patterns.
• Click the Inheritance tab.

On this tab, you can select the profiles to include in the dial plan you are
adding/editing.
 Call Priority
From the drop-down list, select the priority for the inherited dial plan.

6.4.5 Tasks
This section describes how to configure the tasks that can be performed in
TRBOnet Dispatch Console.
• Go to Administration (1), Tasks (2), and see the list of the tasks in the
right pane.

6.4 Administration 169

 • To create a task, click Add (3), and from the drop-down list, select the
appropriate task.
Note: After you have created a task you need to enable it. Just select
the check box (4) beside the task you want to enable.

6.4.5.1 Dispatcher Presence Control

When enabled, this feature checks the presence of dispatchers and sends
notifications to interested parties if the specified dispatchers are not present in
the system.
• In the Tasks pane, double-click Dispatcher Presence Control.
• In the Dispatcher Presence Control dialog box, specify the following
options:

 Presence timeout
Enter the time period, in minutes, that will be used as a timeout to
check for the presence of dispatchers.
 Reminder time
Enter the time period, in seconds, that will be used to show a reminder
pop-up dialog before the planned time of performing the check. When
the reminder appears on top of the screen, the dispatcher must click
the round button in the center to confirm their presence in the system.

170 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 All Dispatchers
Choose this option button so that all dispatchers will be checked for
presence.
 Selected Dispatchers
Choose this option button so that only selected dispatchers will be
checked for presence.
• Dispatchers
In the drop-down list, select the dispatchers.
 Notifications
Click this link to select who will receive the appropriate notifications.
The recipients may include dispatchers, Email groups, SMS groups,
radios, and radio groups.

6.4.5.2 Export to SWD – Location of radio

When enabled, this task will perform exporting location data to a dedicated
SWD Server database.
• In the Tasks pane, double-click Export to SWD – Location of radio.
• In the Export to SWD – Location of radio dialog box, specify the
following options:

Connection tab
• SWD Server Address
Enter the IP Address of the PC with the running SWD Server.
 Port
Enter the port number that will be used for the connection.
• TRBOnet Server Address
Enter the IP Address of the PC with the running TRBOnet Server.
 Port
Enter the port number that will be used for the connection.

6.4 Administration 171

 • Send data with confirmation
Select this option to send location data to the SWD server until a
confirmation is received.
Radios tab
• Send data from all radios
Choose this option so that location data will be sent to the SWD server
from all radios in the system.
• Send data only from selected radios
Choose this option, and in the list below, select the radios whose location
data will be sent to the SWD server.

6.4.5.3 Geofencing
The Geofencing feature allows controlling the location and speed of radios
relative to manually defined regions on the map.
The Geofencing monitoring consists of the manually defined regions and the
tasks. The regions specify where to apply the rules, while the tasks specify how
to apply the rules for the regions and radios.
• In the Tasks pane, double-click Geofencing.
The administrator can add/disable/delete the rules for Geofencing as well as
edit the currently selected rules:

• Click the Add Rule button (1) and select the appropriate rule from the
drop-down list (Map Region, Beacons, Radios, Lone Worker) to add a rule
to the current Geofencing configuration. A new rule will be displayed in
the list of rules (4).
• Click the Disable rule button (2) to disable the selected rule.
• Click the Delete rule button (3) to delete the selected rule.
• Rerun the rules after each rule edit, …
If you select this option (though it is not recommended), the rule will be
rerun each time the rule is modified, or the server is restarted, or when
the scheduled time window starts.

172 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Map Region Rule

This section describes settings that can be applied for a Map Region rule.
General tab
• Name
Specify the rule name.
• Description
Add a description of the rule.
• Run the rule on a schedule
Select this option and in the boxes below specify the schedule for the rule
to run.
 Days of week
In the drop-down list, select the days of the week on which to run the
Geofencing rule.
 Start time
Specify the start time to run the rule.
 Stop time
Set the time to stop running the rule.
• After the rule is triggered
 Reset Alarm mode when the rule conditions are no longer met
Select this option to reset Alarm mode after the rule is triggered.
Location tab

Trigger this rule when a radio:

• Enters the selected regions
Select this option so that the rule will be triggered as soon as a radio
enters the selected region.
• Leaves the selected regions
Select this option so that the rule will be triggered as soon as a radio
leaves the selected region.
• For multiple nested/overlapping regions

6.4 Administration 173

 Choose one of the options specifying for multiple regions whether to
consider only an outer border of the group of regions, or any border of a
region within the group.
Perform the following actions:
Here you specify which actions to execute when the rule is triggered.
• Activate Alarm mode
Select this option to activate an Alarm mode in the Dispatch Console.
• Activate Lone Worker mode
Select this option to automatically activate a Lone Worker mode for the
radio in case of entering or leaving the selected region.
• Send Text Message to the source radio
Select this option to automatically send a text message to the radio when
it enters or leaves the selected region.
• Send notification
Select this option to send a notification when the radio enters or leaves
the selected region. Click the Recipients link and specify the recipients to
send the notification to.
• Send Request to Talk to the source radio
Select this option to automatically send a Request-to-Talk to the radio
when it enters or leaves the selected region.
Speed tab

Trigger the rule when a radio:

• Moves faster than
Select this option and specify the maximum allowed speed for the
vehicles. The rule will be triggered when the vehicle with the radio
exceeds this speed limit.
• Moves slower than
Select this option and specify the minimum allowed speed for the
vehicles. The rule will be triggered when the vehicle with the radio drops
below the specified speed.

174 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Remains motionless longer than

Select this option and specify the time period, in seconds, during which
the vehicle is allowed to remain motionless. The rule will be triggered
when the vehicle with the radio remains motionless longer than this
specified time period.
• Track speed in relation to regions
From the drop-down list, select where to track the speed of the vehicles:
inside or outside the selected regions, or independently of the regions.
Perform the following actions:
Here you specify which actions to execute when the rule is triggered.
• Activate Alarm mode
Select this option to activate an Alarm mode in the Dispatch Console.
• Send Text Message to the source radio
Select this option to automatically send a text message to the radio when
it enters or leaves the selected region.
• Send Request To Talk to the source radio
Select this option to automatically send a Request To Talk to the radio
when it enters or leaves the selected region.
Regions tab

• All regions
Choose this option to apply this rule for all regions.
• Only selected regions
Choose this option to apply the rule for one or several regions.
• Select all
Click this button to select all regions in the list.
• Deselect all
Click this button to deselect all regions in the list.

6.4 Administration 175

 Radios tab

• All radios
Choose this option to apply this rule for all radios.
• Only selected radios
Choose this option to apply the rule for one or several radios.
• Select all (1)
Click this button to select all radios in the list.
• Clear all (2)
Click this button to deselect all radios in the list.
• Collapse all (3)
Click this button to collapse the view of radios in the list.
• Expand all (4)
Click this button to expand the view of radios in the list.

• (5)
Click this button, and from the drop-down menu, select filters for the
radios to be displayed in the list (Online (Indoor, GPS Fixed, No GPS),
Offline).

• (5)
Click this button, and from the drop-down menu, select which list to
display: Radio List, Radio Groups, or Logical Groups.

176 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Lone Worker tab

• All Tasks
Choose this option to execute all Lone Worker tasks configured by the
administrator when the rule has been triggered.
• Only selected tasks
Choose this option, and in the list below, select the Lone Worker tasks to
be executed when the rule has been triggered.
Other Rules
This section describes settings that can be applied for Geofencing rules of the
types other than Map Region (Beacons, Radios, and Lone Worker). These
settings are represented in the table below:
Rule Type Tab Name Parameters Description

Settings common General Name – specify the rule name.

for all rule types Description – add the rule description.

Scheduler Run the rule on a schedule - select to start a

scheduler for Geofencing rules.
Days of week - select the days of the week on
which to activate the Geofencing rule.
Start time - set the time at which to start the rule.
Stop time - set the time at which to stop the rule.

Radios All radios – choose to apply this rule for all radios;
Only selected radios – choose to apply the rule for
one or several radios;

6.4 Administration 177

 Rule Type Tab Name Parameters Description

Beacons General Control mode:

Allows configuring Control entering beacon coverage zone – select
rules when a radio to enable the rule when a radio enters the beacon
enters or leaves coverage zone.
the beacon Control leaving beacon coverage zone - select
coverage zone to enable the rule when a radio leaves the beacon
coverage zone.
Activate Alarm mode if the rule has been
triggered - select this option to activate Alarm mode
in the Dispatch Console if Beacons rule has been
triggered.
Reset Alarm mode if the rule is not triggered –
select to reset Alarm mode in the Dispatch
Console automatically if the rule condition was not
triggered (for example, when Control entering
beacon coverage zone is selected and the radio
enters the monitored coverage zone and then
leaves the zone, the alarm mode in the Dispatch
Console will be reset automatically).
Send Request to Talk to a radio if the rule has
been triggered – select this option to automatically
send a Request To Talk to the radio if the rule has
been triggered.
Send Text Message to a radio if the rule has been
triggered – select this option to automatically send a
text message to the radio if the rule has been
triggered.
Activate Lone Worker if the rule has been
triggered – select this option to allow automatically
activating a Lone Worker policy for a radio in case of
entering or leaving beacon coverage zone.
Scheduler See above.
Radios See above.
Beacons All Beacons – choose to apply this rule for all
beacons;
Only selected beacons – choose to apply the rule for
one or several beacons.
Lone Worker All Tasks – choose to apply all tasks configured by the
administrator when the rule has been triggered;
Only selected tasks – choose this option, and in the
list below, select the Lone Worker tasks to be
executed when the rule has been triggered.

178 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Rule Type Tab Name Parameters Description

Radios General Control mode:

Allows using Control Entering Region – select to enable the
radio(s) as map rule when a radio enters the vicinity zone
region(s) and associated with another radio.
monitoring when Control Leaving Region - select to enable the
another radio rule when a radio leaves the vicinity zone
enters or leaves associated with another radio.
the vicinity of the
radio’s zone Activate Alarm mode if the rule has been
triggered - select to activate Alarm mode in the
Dispatch Console if Radios rule has been triggered.
Reset Alarm mode if the rule is not triggered –
select to reset Alarm mode in the Dispatch Console
automatically if the rule condition was not triggered
(for example, when Control Entering Region is
selected and radio enters to the monitored vicinity
zone and then instantly leaves the zone, alarm mode
in the Dispatch Console will be reset automatically).
Send Text Message to a radio if the rule has been
triggered – select to inform radio user if the rule has
been triggered.
Send Request To Talk to a radio if the rule has
been triggered – select to inform radio user if the
rule has been triggered.
Minimum distance between radios – specify the
distance, in meters or feet, depending on what is
chosen in Tools > Options > Advanced /
Measurement system. When a distance is less than
the selected value, the rule will be triggered
according to the settings above.
Color of region – select the color for the radio's
vicinity zone.
Scheduler See above.
Radio Regions Select the radios that will used as the regions the rule
is applied for.
Radios See above.
Map Regions Rule works only in regions
Select this option and then choose either All regions
or Only selected regions.

6.4 Administration 179

 Rule Type Tab Name Parameters Description

Lone Worker General Days of week - select the days of the week to activate
Allows configuring the Lone Worker rule.
scheduled Lone Start time - set the time to start the rule;
Worker tasks Stop time - set the time to stop the rule.

Radios See above.

Lone Worker Select either All tasks or Only selected tasks from
the list of Lone Worker tasks configured by
Administrator.
When a Lone Worker task is mentioned as Disabled,
the Administrator should enable the task.

6.4.5.4 Idle Time

The Idle Time feature allows monitoring vehicles idle time assigning Telemetry
Commands on selected VIOs.
• In the Tasks pane, double-click Idle Time.
Specify the telemetry command to set the Idle Time:

Start
• Specify the telemetry VIO and Command to start the Idle Time task.
Stop
• Specify the telemetry VIO and Command to stop the Idle Time task.
The administrator can see Idle Time reports and statistics.
Click Reports (1), and under GPS reports, click Idle Time Summary or Idle
Time detailed (2) to see a common Idle Time report:

180 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Note: Specify the speed accuracy value in the Speed box (3).

6.4.5.5 Radio Allocation (Sprite Forms)

This function is used for direct communication between the dispatcher and the
subscriber via special Tallysman Option board installed into the radio. The
dispatcher and subscriber have special form templates. The dispatcher receives
Duty ID of the subscriber with his template output form whereas the
subscriber sends it using his template input form. The radio name changes to
its Duty ID.

Note: Any activity may be decoded with its Duty ID so this is a

way to communicate for the dispatcher and subscribers
only.

• In the Tasks pane, double-click Radio Allocation (Sprite Forms).

• Load the Sprite Form (output template) and select the Field Name:

• Click OK to add a Sprite Form.

6.4.5.6 SMS and Email Notifications

TRBOnet Dispatch Console allows managing text messages:
1. Send Text Messages from LAN to a particular radio or talk group (POP3
Server);
2. Forward all Text Messages from radios to base radio to particular email
address (SMTP Server).
Note: Microsoft Exchange Server can be used as SMTP and
POP3 servers. For more details on SMTP or POP3
servers, ask your System Administrator.

• In the Tasks pane, double-click SMS and Email notifications:

6.4 Administration 181

 SMS settings tab

 Send SMS to recipients if ALARM has been activated

Select this option to send an SMS in case of an alarm on the radio.
 Send MMS to recipients if ALARM has been activated
Select this option to send an MMS in case of an alarm on the radio.
Forward Text Messages to cell phone recipients
 Input messages (from radio network to dispatchers)
Select this option to forward incoming text messages to cell phones.
 Output messages (from dispatchers to radio network)
Select this option to forward outgoing text messages to cell phones.
For more details on SMS settings, see section 5.16.2, Outgoing Mail Server
(page 101).
A radio sends text messages to the base station. TRBOnet Server forwards all
text messages to a particular email address (for example,
[email protected]). The administrator receives text messages from
radios as regular emails.

182 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Outgoing Email settings (SMTP) tab

 Send Email to recipients if ALARM has been activated

Select this option to send an Email in case of alarm.
Forward Text Messages to email recipients
 Input messages (from radio network to dispatchers)
Select this option to forward incoming text messages to Email
address(es).
 Output messages (from dispatchers to radio network)
Select this option to forward outgoing text messages to Email
address(es).
Incoming Email settings tab
TRBOnet Server connects to POP3 server, reads emails and sends text
messages to radios or talk groups.
1. Create an email account on your email server.
2. Send an email to [email protected]. In the Subject field,
enter either 'RadioID:XXX' to send an email to a selected radio, or
'GroupID:XXX' to send an email to a selected radio group.
Note: If you don't properly specify the email Subject, or
specified a non-existing RadioID (or GroupID), a
corresponding notification will appear in the Event
Viewer of the Dispatch Console.

• Forward incoming emails to radio network (from email box to radios)

Select this option to forward incoming emails to radio network.
6.4.5.7 User Activity
The User Activity function allows the dispatcher to create lists of radios, to
which radios can be assigned due to their activity.

6.4 Administration 183

 For example, if a subscriber sends an On duty message or presses an exact
preset telemetry button, this subscriber gets assigned to the On duty list in the
Dispatch Console. The dispatcher can also manually assign subscribers to lists.
• In the Tasks pane, double-click User Activity:
States tab

• Click Add to add a list of radio activities:

 Name
Specify a name for the user activity list.
 Description
Add a description for the user activity list.
 Background
Select the background color to display the radios assigned to the list.
Set this state to radios by using the following rules:
 Manually by dispatcher
Select this option to assign radios to the list manually.

184 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Automatically by receiving Text Message from a radio

Select this option to assign a radio to the list after receiving a text
message from the radio. If you select this option, specify a brief text
message in the Message box.
 Automatically by receiving Telemetry Command from a radio
Select this option to assign a radio to the list after receiving a telemetry
command. If you select this option, specify the VIO contact, and from
the Command drop-down list, select the signal level at which the
user's radio should send the telemetry command.
 Automatically by receiving DTMF command from a radio
Select this option to assign a radio to the list after receiving a
predefined DTMF command, for instance, #11#. If you select this
option, specify a DTMF combination without the # characters in the
Command box.
 Automatically by receiving Status from a radio
Select this option to assign a radio to the list after receiving a specified
Status, for instance, 1. If you select this option, specify the Status.
To assign offline radios to the default User Activity state, click the Advanced
tab:

• Set the default state to offline radios

Select this option to enable setting the default state to offline radios.
• Timeout
Specify the time period, in minutes, after which the default state will be
set to an offline radio.

6.4.5.8 Lone Worker

The Lone Worker policy lets the dispatcher set a time interval the
communication with a radio user is expected. For example, if a lone worker has
not called the dispatcher for 15 minutes, the radio receives a message and the
Dispatcher receives an alarm signal.

6.4 Administration 185

 • To add a Lone Worker task, in the Tasks pane, click Add > Lone Worker.
• In the Lone Worker dialog box that appears, specify the following
parameters:

Task Start tab

• Manually by dispatcher
Select this option to start the Lone Worker task manually by the
dispatcher.
• Automatically by receiving Text Message from a radio
Select this option so that the Lone Worker task will start after receiving a
message from a radio. If you select this option, specify a text message in
the Message box.
• Automatically by receiving Telemetry Command from a radio
Select this option so that the Lone Worker task will start after receiving a
telemetry command from a radio. If you select this option, specify the VIO
contact, and from the Command drop-down list, select the signal level at
which the user's radio should send the telemetry command.
• Automatically by receiving DTMF command from a radio
Select this option so that the Lone Worker task will start after receiving a
predefined DTMF command, for instance, #11#. If you select this option,
specify a DTMF combination without the # characters in the Command
box.
• Automatically by receiving Status from a radio
Select this option so that the Lone Worker task will start after receiving a
specified status from a radio. If you select this option, specify Status.
• Send the following text message to the radio
Select this option and in the Message box enter the text message that
will be sent to the radio when a Lone Worker task is started for that radio.

186 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Conditions tab

• Response time
Specify the time period, in minutes, that determines how long TRBOnet
Server waits since the last radio transmission.
• Send notification to radio
Select this option so that TRBOnet Server will send a notification to the
radio before raising the alarm if the radio has not transmitted for the
specified time period.
 Reminder time
Specify the time period before it comes to raise the alarm, to send a
notification asking the radio to respond.
 Send Request to Talk
Choose this option to send a Request-to-Talk to the radio.
 Send Text Message
Choose this option to send a text message to the radio. Specify the
message text in the Message box.
• Reset Lone Worker when receiving Text Message
Select this option to reset the Lone Worker task after receiving the
message specified in the Message box.
• Reset Lone Worker when receiving Telemetry command
Select this option to reset the Lone Worker task after receiving the
telemetry command. If you select this option, specify the VIO contact, and
from the Command drop-down list, select the signal level at which the
user's radio should send the telemetry command.
• Reset Lone Worker when the distance has been traveled
Select this option to reset the Lone Worker task after the distance
specified in the Distance box has been traveled.

6.4 Administration 187

 • Do not trigger alarm if radio is offline for less than
Select this option so that the alarm is not triggered if the radio is offline
for a time less than the time specified in the Interval box.
Task Stop tab

In the Task Stop tab, you can specify how to stop the Lone Worker task.
The available options are similar to those you specified on the Task Start
tab.
Enabling Lone Worker
• To enable the Lone Worker task for a selected radio, go to Voice Dispatch
(1), right-click the selected radio (2), and choose Start Lone Worker (3):

• To monitor the Lone Worker task, click the Active Tasks tab:

188 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Enabling Lone Worker from Geofencing

• Click Location Tracking (1), and click the Geofencing button (2) in the
Map pane:

• In the Geofencing and Speed Control dialog box, click

Add Rule > Lone Worker (1):

6.4 Administration 189

  Enter a Name for the Lone Worker rule and add a Description.
 Days of week
In the drop-down list, select the days of the week on which to activate
the Lone Worker rule.
 Start time
Specify the time at which to start the rule.
 Stop time
Specify the time at which to stop the rule.
• Click the Radios tab and select radios to which to apply the Lone Worker
rule:

 All radios
Choose to apply this rule to all radios.
 Only selected radios
Choose to apply the rule to one or several radios.
 Select all
Click to select all radios in the list.

190 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Clear all
Click to deselect all radios in the list.
• Click the Lone Worker tab and select the configured Lone Worker tasks:

 Choose either all configured Lone Worker tasks or several configured

tasks.
Note: When a Lone Worker task is mentioned as Disabled,
enable it on the Tasks pane.

6.4.5.9 Export Data

TRBOnet Dispatch Console provides the Export Data function, which allows
exporting data to an external database table.
• To add an Export Data task, in the Tasks pane, click Add > Export Data.
• In the Export Data dialog box, specify the following parameters:

Connection tab
• Task name
Enter a name for the task.

6.4 Administration 191

 • Type
Select the type of data export from the drop-down list. TRBOnet Dispatch
Console allows exporting data for third-party systems using data export
tasks.
 Export to database table
Allows exporting data to MS SQL Server tables. Specify MS SQL Server
connection parameters, database, and table to export data.
 Export to Versatrans
Allows exporting data to the Versatrans data collection system via IP.
For more details, visit the official website of Versatrans.
 Export to Google
Allows exporting data to file (file format is KML). For more details, visit
the following website.
 Export to NMEA
Allows exporting data to a file (text file format, export format is NMEA
0183). For more details, visit the following website.
 Export to file
Allows exporting data to a text file.
• Data
Select which data to export from the drop-down list.
• Default connection
Choose this option for default connection to SQL Server.
• Specified connection
Choose this option and specify the SQL Server and database name.
• Server name
Specify the SQL server name.
• Database name
Select the database from the drop-down list.
• Windows authentication
Select this option to use Windows authentication, or deselect it to use
SQL Server authentication (SQL Server user name and password will be
required).

192 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Data tab

• Table
the name of the table to be exported into external database (by default,
the name of the table is created after you have specified it in Create table
dialog box).
• Click the Load columns list link to update the columns list in case you
have made any changes to the table.
• Click the Create table link to add a new table for data export:

 Select the data fields to add to the table.

6.4 Administration 193

 Scheduler tab

• Days of week
In the drop-down list, select the days of the week on which to export the
data.
• Execute recurrently with interval
Choose this option to perform data export on a periodic basis.
 Start time
Specify the time at which to start data export.
 Stop time
Specify the time at which to stop data export.
 Repeat every
Specify a time period for periodic data exports.
• Execute at particular time
Choose this option and specify the times in the columns of the table
below.

194 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Advanced tab

• Export only changed data

Select this option to export only changed location of the radio data.
• Export mode
Choose the mode for exporting data.

6.4.5.10 Scheduled Task

This task allows sending scheduled commands to selected radios.
• To add a scheduled task, in the Tasks pane, click Add > Scheduled Task.
• In the Scheduled Task dialog box, specify the following parameters:

 Task name
Enter a name for the task.

6.4 Administration 195

 Command tab
 Command
From the drop-down list, select what to send to selected radios.
For a description of the available commands, see sections 6.5.6.1 -
6.5.6.10.
Scheduler tab

• Start date
Select a date to start the task.
• Stop date
Select a date to stop the task.
• Days of week
In the drop-down list, select the days of the week on which to perform the
task.
• Execute recurrently with interval
Choose this option to perform the task on a periodic basis.
• Start time
Specify the time at which to start the task.
• Stop time
Specify the time at which to stop the task.
• Repeat every
Specify a time period for periodic task executions.
• Execute at particular time
Choose this option and specify the times in the columns of the table
below.

6.4.5.11 Voice Message

The Voice Message task allows you to automatically broadcast a predefined
Voice Message after receiving a telemetry command, a text message, or a
DTMF command.

196 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• To add a Voice Message task, in the Tasks pane, click Add > Voice
Message.
The user can have several Voice Message policies for different purposes.
Specify a name for the policy in the Task name box and set the policy's
parameters.
Task Settings tab

• Load from file

Click this link to load an existing file from your PC.
• Record message
Click this link to record a new voice message.
• Play back message
Click this link to play back the voice message.
• Click the Add link and specify Call Type, Channel, and Call Destination
for a voice message.
Note: To send a Voice Message to a contact from the phone
book, click the ellipsis (…) button in the Call Destination
column and select a contact from the phone book.

• Priority
From the drop-down list, select the priority with which the voice message
will be sent/queued. If this priority is higher than that of the current
transmission, which is, in turn, allowed to be interrupted, the current
transmission will be interrupted and the voice message will be sent
instead.
• Offset
Specify the delay time, in seconds, for the Voice Message task.

6.4 Administration 197

 • Send Voice Message
 This many times
Enter the number of times to send the voice message.
 Every
Set the repeat interval, in seconds, if the voice message is sent more
than once.
Start Conditions tab

• Manually by dispatcher
Select this option to allow the dispatcher to manually start the Voice
Message task.
• Automatically by receiving Text Message from a radio
Select this option to start the Voice Message task after receiving a
specified text message from a radio. If you select this option, specify a
brief text message in the Message box.
• Automatically by receiving Telemetry Command from a radio
Select this option to start the Voice Message task after receiving a
telemetry command. If you select this option, specify the VIO contact, and
from the Command drop-down list, select the signal level at which the
user's radio should send the telemetry command.
• Automatically by receiving DTMF command from a radio
Select this option to start the Voice Message task after receiving a DTMF
command from a radio, for instance, #11#. If you select this option,
specify a DTMF combination without the # characters in the Command
box.
• Automatically by receiving Emergency from a radio
Select this option to start the Voice Message task after receiving an
emergency command from a radio.

198 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Emg. Type
From the drop-down list, select the type of emergency to be sent from
a radio.
• Activated by any radio
Choose this option to expect receiving data from any radio in the system.
• Activate by specific radios only
Choose this option to expect receiving data from selected radios.
 Radio
In the drop-down list, select the radio(s).
• Send Text Message to a radio
Select this option so that a text message will be sent to the radio that
activated the Voice Message task. If you select this option, specify a brief
text message in the Message box.
Stop Conditions tab

Note: These options are available only if you have selected the Send
Voice Message repeatedly option in the Task Process tab.

• Manually by dispatcher
Select this option to allow the dispatcher to manually stop the Voice
Message task.
• Automatically by receiving Text Message from a radio
Select this option to stop the Voice Message task after receiving a
message from a radio. If you select this option, specify a text message in
the Message box.

6.4 Administration 199

 • Automatically by receiving Telemetry Command from a radio
Select this option to stop the Voice Message task after receiving a
telemetry command from a radio: If you select this option, specify the VIO
contact, and from the Command drop-down list, select the signal level at
which the user's radio should send the telemetry command.
• Automatically by receiving DTMF command from a radio
Select this option to stop the Voice Message task after receiving a DTMF
command from a radio, for instance, #11#. If you select this option,
specify a DTMF combination without the # characters in the Command
box.
• Send Text Message to a radio
Select this option so that a text message will be sent to the radio that
stopped the Voice Message task. If you select this option, specify a brief
text message in the Message box.
Telemetry tab

• Send telemetry before starting task

Select this option to send a telemetry command before the voice message
is transmitted.
 Specify the VIO contact number.
 Select the signal level from the Command list.
 Delay after sending
Specify the time period, in seconds, to wait before sending the voice
message after the telemetry command has been sent.
• Send telemetry after stopping task
Select this option to send a telemetry command after the Voice Message
task is stopped.
 Specify the VIO contact number.

200 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Select the signal level from the Command list.

 Delay before sending
Specify the time period, in seconds, to wait before sending the
telemetry command after the voice message has been sent.
• Recipient
In the drop-down list, select the radios/groups to send the telemetry
command to.
• Send Telemetry on every Voice Message
Select this option to send the telemetry command to the selected
radios/groups every time the voice message is sent, provided the voice
message is repeatedly sent.

6.4.5.12 Recorder
The Recorder feature allows connecting to an audio recorder via IP.
• To enable the task, in the Tasks pane, click Add > Recorder:
The feature allows replicating audio recordings to the recorder:

• Task name
Enter a name for the task.
• IP
Enter the recorder's IP address.
• Port
Specify the recorder's port number.
• Click Test of channels to view all available channels on the recorder.
• Click OK to add the task.

6.4.5.13 Agenda
The Agenda is used to automatically send predefined messages to the radios. It
may be used when you have any software receiving any messages but it is not
able to send them to the subscribers. In this case, TRBOnet Dispatch Console

6.4 Administration 201

 acts as an intermediary for receiving the messages from the folder and sending
them to radios.
• To add an agenda, in the Tasks pane, click Add > Agenda.
• In the Agenda dialog box, specify the following parameters.

 Task name
Enter a name for the task.
 Outgoing folder (on server)
Specify the outgoing folder for the text messages to be displayed in
the Dispatch Console (for example, C:\Outgoing).
 Incoming folder (on server)
Specify the incoming folder for the reports (for example,
C:\Incoming files);
 Wait for response
Specify the time interval, in seconds, for the response.
 Text to confirm
Specify the text to be sent by the subscribers after they receive the
message.
6.4.5.14 Import Phone Addresses
The Import Phone Addresses option allows importing phone/address data
from a NENA database to TRBOnet database.
To perform this task:
• In the Tasks pane, click Add > Import Phone Addresses (NENA)
• In the Import Phone Addresses (NENA) dialog box, browse for the
corresponding *.CSV file, and click OK.

6.4.5.15 Scheduled Report

The Scheduled Report task allows reporting on selected parameters and
sending these reports to selected Email subscribers groups. The user can have
several Scheduled Report policies for different purposes.

202 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Note: Before configuring the task, you need to create a

number of the Email groups to send reports to. For
more details on Email groups, see section 6.4.26, Email
Groups (page 263).

• To add a Scheduled Report task, in the Tasks pane, click

Add > Scheduled Report:
• Specify a name for the policy in the Task name box and set the policy
parameters.

• On the Report tab, select the type of a report for the Scheduled Report
task.
The report details and filter might be different.
For more details on reporting, see section 6.11, Reports (page 357).
• Click the Scheduler tab to configure a schedule for the report.

6.4 Administration 203

 • Schedulers
On the list, select the scheduler(s) to use for the report.
Or, click the plus sign button and specify a new scheduler (see section
6.4.22, Schedulers).
• For the past
Select the past time interval (in minutes, hours, days, weeks, or months)
to collect the data for.
• Email groups
In the list, select Email groups to send the report to.
The created scheduled report will be displayed in the Tasks pane:

To enable the task, select the check box in front of the Scheduled Report task
you have already created.
There are three types of the Scheduled Report status icons:
• Green indicates an active task, meaning the task is enabled (checked).
• Grey indicates an inactive task, meaning the task is disabled (unchecked).
• Red indicates a disabled task, meaning the task period is up in the past.

6.4.5.16 Import Beacon Data from Firebird DB

The Import beacon data from Firebird DB option allows importing beacon
data from Firebird database to TRBOnet Dispatch Software database.
• To add the task, in the Tasks pane, click Add > Import beacon data from
DB "Firebird".
• In the dialog box that opens, specify the following parameters:

204 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Name
Specify a name for the task.
• Server
Specify a remote server or a server on the local PC.
• User
Enter the name of the Firebird DB user.
• Database path
Specify the Firebird DB path.
• Password
Specify a password to connect to Firebird DB (provided at logon).
• Port
Specify the port number to connect to Firebird DB.
• Update (sec.)
Specify the update period for Firebird DB.
• Click Test to test the connection to Firebird DB.
• Click the Import tab to specify Import settings:

• Import data from

Specify the Firebird DB name.

6.4 Administration 205

 • Click Import to import data.
• Delete old data
Select this option to delete all previously imported data from Firebird DB.
• Report
In this box, an import report will be displayed.
• Click OK to add the task.

6.4.5.17 HotSOS (Email)

The HotSOS (Email) task is used to automatically create and assign job tickets
upon receiving email messages at the address specified for the radio (Radio >
Additional > Email). In addition, you specify the email address at which to
receive email messages about changes to the created ticket status.
• In the Tasks pane, click Add > HotSOS (Email).
• In the HotSOS Configuration dialog box, specify the following
parameters:

 Name
Enter a name for the task.
 Email
Enter the email address at which you want to receive notifications
concerning the status of the created tickets.
 Source
From the drop-down list, select which part of the email message,
Subject or Body, will be included in the job ticket text.
 HotSOS Status
Enter the text of the emails that will be sent as notifications upon
changes to the job ticket status.
6.4.5.18 HotSOS (Web Service)
The HotSOS (Web Service) task is used to create and assign job tickets by
using the HotSOS Web Service.
• In the Tasks pane, click Add > HotSOS (Web Service).

206 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the HotSOS Configuration dialog box, specify the following

parameters:

 Name
Enter a name for the task.
 URL
Enter the URL of the service.
 Login and Password
Enter the login and password of the service account.
 Provider
Enter the service provider name.
 Polling Interval
Enter the interval, in seconds, to check the service for orders (job
tickets).
 Text Messages
If you select this option, additional text messages will arrive at the
designated radios from the HotSOS server.
 Message Format
Select the fields of a message to include in the job ticket text.
 HotSOS Status
Enter the text of the messages that will be sent as notifications to the
HotSOS server upon changes to the job ticket status.

6.4.5.19 Timer
The Timer task is used to configure the timer that can be
started/stopped/paused either manually by dispatchers, or when receiving a
certain text message, telemetry command, DTMF command, or status from
radios.

6.4 Administration 207

 • In the Tasks pane, click Add > Timer.
• In the dialog box, specify the following parameters:

• Task name
Enter a name for the task.
• Global timer
If you select this option, the timer will be started/stopped, etc. via the
Alarm Management (Timers action).
Task Start/ Task Stop tabs
• Manually by dispatcher
Select this option to allow the dispatcher to manually start/stop the timer
for the desired radio.
• Automatically by receiving Text Message from a radio
Select this option to start/stop the timer when receiving a predefined text
message from a radio. If you select this option, specify a brief text
message in the Message box.
• Automatically by receiving Telemetry Command from a radio
Select this option to start/stop the timer when receiving a predefined
telemetry command from a radio. If you select this option, specify the VIO
contact, and from the Command drop-down list, select the signal level at
which the user's radio should send the telemetry command.
• Automatically by receiving DTMF command from a radio
Select this option to start/stop the timer when receiving specified DTMF
tones from a radio. If you select this option, specify a DTMF combination
without the # characters in the Command box.
• Automatically by receiving Status from a radio
Select this option to start/stop the timer when receiving specified Status
from a radio, for instance, 1. If you select this option, specify the Status.

208 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Send Text Message to a radio

Select this option so that a text message will be sent to a radio when the
timer is started/stopped. If you select this option, specify a brief text
message in the Message box.
Task Stop tab
• After
Specify the duration of the timer, in minutes.
Status texts tab
In the text boxes below, enter the texts for the corresponding statuses: timer
started, stopped by dispatcher/radio/system, elapsed, and paused.
Dispatchers tab
• All Dispatchers
Choose this option button so that the timer will be available to all
dispatchers.
• Selected Dispatchers
Choose this option button so that the timer will be available only to
selected dispatchers.
 Dispatchers
In the list below, select the dispatchers.

6.4.5.20 Automatic Data Retrieval

The Automatic Data Retrieval task is used to automatically retrieve missing
location data from the radio's option board.
• In the Tasks pane, click Add > Automatic Data Retrieval (Swift GPS).
• In the dialog box, specify the following parameters:

 Maximum number of simultaneous requests

Specify the maximum number of radios being requested at the same
time.

6.4 Administration 209

  Retrieve missing locations if the data gap exceeds
TRBOnet Server automatically checks whether the location data is
continuous. If it detects data gaps between any consecutive location
data that exceed this value, it will attempt to retrieve missing
information.
 Don't retrieve missing locations older than
TRBOnet Server doesn't check location updates for consistency if they
are older than this value in seconds, minutes, or hours.
 On the Radios tab, specify the radio(s) to retrieve location data from.
In the Tasks pane, activate the Automatic Data Retrieval (Swift GPS) task by
selecting the check box next to the task name.
6.4.5.21 Automatic Voice Download
The Automatic Voice Download task is used to automatically retrieve voice
data from the radio's option board when the radio is in WiFi zone.
• In the Tasks pane, click Add > Automatic Voice Download (Swift).

• In the dialog box, specify the following parameters:

 Maximum number of simultaneous requests
Specify the maximum number of simultaneously requested radios.
 Save to
Specify the path where to save voice data on your PC.
 On the Radios tab, specify the radio(s) to retrieve voice data from.
In the Tasks pane, activate the Automatic Voice Download (Swift) task by
selecting the check box next to the task name.

6.4.5.22 Sign-in Reminder

The Sign-in Reminder task is used to remind users to sign in into the radio(s).
• To add a Sign-in Reminder task, in the Tasks pane,
click Add > Sign-in Reminder.
• In the dialog box that opens, specify the following parameters:

210 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Name
Enter a name for the task.
 Click the Add link and from the drop-down list, select either
Text Message or Text to Speech.
In the dialog box that opens, specify the following:
• Timeout
Specify the time, in minutes, to wait before sending the message
(voice message) to the selected radio(s).
• Text Message / Text to Speech
Enter the text of the message (voice message) to be sent to the
selected radio(s).
 Run again after user signs out
Select this option to rerun the task after the user signs out.
 Disable the radio(s) if not signed in …
Select this option to disable the radio(s) if the user didn't sign in after
being notified.
• Timeout
Specify the corresponding timeout, in minutes.
 Click the Radios tab, and select the radio(s) to send reminder(s) to.

6.4.5.23 Sign-out Reminder

The Sign-out Reminder task is used to remind users to sign out of the radio(s).
• To add a Sign-out Reminder task, in the Tasks pane,
click Add > Sign-out Reminder.
• In the dialog box that opens, enter the following parameters:

6.4 Administration 211

  Name
Enter a name for the task.
 Click the Add link and from the drop-down list, select either
Text Message or Text to Speech.
In the dialog box that opens, specify the following:
• Timeout
Specify the time, in minutes, before the end of the work shift.
• Text Message / Text to Speech
Enter the text of the message (voice message) to be sent to the
selected radio(s).
 Work shift duration
Enter the duration of the work shift, in HH:MM.
 Auto sign-out
Select this option to automatically sign out the user from the radio as
soon as the work shift ends.
 Notify if the user hasn't signed out in time
Select this option and choose among Notification recipients by clicking
the link below.

6.4.5.24 Screensaver
The Screensaver task is used to launch a screensaver when the dispatcher is
idle for a period longer than the specified timeout. Once started, the
screensaver will be stopped when you click the mouse button or press any
keyboard key, or there is an emergency call or a request to talk.
• To add a Screensaver task, in the Tasks pane, click Add > Screensaver
• In the dialog box that opens, specify the following parameters:

212 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Name
Enter a name for the task.
 Show screensaver if no activity more than
Set the time of inactivity, in minutes, after which the screensaver will
automatically run.
 Background / Foreground
Select the background/foreground colors for the screensaver.
 Text
Enter the text that will be displayed in the screensaver.
 All Dispatcher / Selected Dispatchers
Select the dispatcher(s) to assign the screensaver task to.
 Test
Click this button to see how the screensaver will look.

6.4.5.25 Import Objects

The Import Objects task is used to import new objects to the Users database
and Radios database based on the .CSV data files.
• To add an Import Objects task, in the Tasks pane, click Add > Import
Objects

6.4 Administration 213

 In the dialog box that opens, enter the following information:
 Name
Enter a name for the task.
• General tab
 Object Type
From the drop-down list, select into which database to import data
(Beacons, IP Cameras, Map Objects, Map Regions, Map Routes,
Phone Contacts, Radio Users, or Radios).
 File Path
Click the ellipsis (…) button and locate the .CSV file on the same PC with
TRBOnet Server.
 Passwords encrypted
Select this option if the passwords are encrypted in the data being
imported.
 Delete objects not present in file
Select this option so that objects not found in the .CSV file will be
deleted from the database.
• Update tab
 File Changed
Choose this option so that the specified database will be updated as
soon as the source CSV file is changed. Note that the source .CSV file
must reside on the same PC with TRBOnet Server.
 Scheduler
Choose this option and on the list below select the scheduler to use to
perform the task. Or, click the plus sign button and specify a new
scheduler (see section 6.4.22, Schedulers).
• Column Mapping tab
In the table below, in the right column, enter/change the column names
that would correspond to the database field names.

6.4.5.26 Export Objects

The Export Objects task is used to export objects from the Users database and
Radios database to external .CSV data files.
• To add an Export Objects task, in the Tasks pane, click Add > Export
Objects

214 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

In the dialog box that opens, enter the following information:

 Name
Enter a name for the task.
 Object Type
From the drop-down list, select which database to export (Beacons,
IP Cameras, Map Objects, Map Regions, Map Routes, Phone Contacts,
Radio Users, or Radios).
 Columns
In the drop-down list, select the columns to be exported into a .CSV
file.
 Scheduler
Choose this option and on the list below select the scheduler to use to
perform the task. Or, click the plus sign button and specify a new
scheduler (see section 6.4.22, Schedulers).
 File Path
Click the ellipsis (…) button and locate the CSV file on your computer
(or elsewhere).

6.4.6 Custom Fields

In this section, you can add custom fields that can later be used when
registering radios (see section 6.4.32, Radios, Additional tab) and users (see
section 6.4.28, Users, Custom Fields tab).
• Go to Administration (1), Custom Fields (2)

6.4 Administration 215

 • Click the Add button (3).
• In the Custom Field dialog box, specify the parameters of the field, such
as its Name, Key, Type (Text, Phone, Email, or Barcode), and Description.

6.4.7 Modbus TCP Connections

TRBOnet Server can receive and send data from/to Modbus hardware and
interact with Modbus data according to desired scenarios. There are two
connection modes between TRBOnet Server and Modbus hardware: Master
and Slave.
To connect TRBOnet Server to Modbus hardware:
• Go to Administration (1), Modbus TCP Connections (2):

• In the Modbus pane, click Add (3).

216 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 From the Mode drop-down list, select the mode of connection.

• If the 'Slave' mode is selected, specify the Port of TRBOnet PC and
the Slave ID to assign to this PC.
Leave Behavior as Custom if this connection will be used for Alarm
management.
• If the 'Master' mode is selected, specify the Remote Address, Port,
and ID of the Modbus device, which in turn will be running in the
Slave mode.

 Parallel Requests
Select this check box so that TRBOnet Server can send multiple
requests without waiting for responses from the Modbus device.

6.4.8 Virtual Modbus Devices

Once you have created the appropriate TCP connection, you can add a Modbus
device:
• Go to Administration, Virtual Modbus Devices, and click Add.

In the Virtual Modbus Device dialog box, specify the following

parameters:
 Name
Enter the name of the device.
 Description
Enter the description of the device.
 Configuration
From the drop-down list, select the slave connection you previously
created for the device (that is, TRBOnet Server running in the Slave
mode).

6.4 Administration 217

  Table
From the drop-down list, select the appropriate MODBUS data type
('Discrete Inputs', 'Coils', 'Input Registers', or 'Holding Registers').
In the 'Address/Value' table, enter the appropriate register values.

6.4.9 IP Cameras
This section describes how to connect IP cameras to TRBOnet Dispatch
Console. Once connected, the cameras can be associated with radios, beacons
and other map objects.
• Go to Administration, IP Cameras to manage IP cameras in the system.
• In the IP Cameras pane, click the Add button.
• In the IP Camera Configuration dialog box, specify the following
parameters:

 Name
Enter a name for the camera.
 Description
Enter a description for the camera.
 URI
Enter the URI for the camera. Note the use of the RTSP:// prefix and
port number 554 (also note that some cameras may have been
configured to use a different port number other than 554).
 Protocol
From the drop-down list, select UDP.
 Authorization
• User
Enter the user name for the authentication, if needed.
• Password
Enter the password for the authentication, if needed.

6.4.10 Public Announcements

This section describes how to connect Public Announcement units to TRBOnet
Dispatch Console.
• Go to Administration (1), Public Announcements (2).

218 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Public Announcements pane, select the Public Announcements

tab (3).
• Click the Add button (4).

In the Public Announcement Configuration dialog box, enter the following

parameters:
• Name
Enter a name for the PA unit.
• Description
Enter a description for the PA unit.
• External ID
Enter the external ID for the Public Announcement unit. This ID will be
used when an announcement is sent to the PA unit from some external
system.
• IP connection
 IP Address
Enter the IP address of the PA unit.
 Port
Enter the port number that will be used for the connection.
• Radio connection
 Connection type
From the drop-down list, select how the radio is connected within the
PA unit.
 Radio ID
Enter the Radio ID of the PA unit's radio. The Radio ID must be unique
in the radio system.
Adding Public Announcement Zones
• In the Public Announcements pane, select the Zones tab.
• Click the Add button.

6.4 Administration 219

 • In the dialog box that opens, click the Main tab.

 Name
Enter a name for the PA zone.
 Description
Enter a description for the PA zone.
 Radio ID
Enter the Radio ID of the PA zone.
Note: Due to some technical restrictions, this must be the
Radio ID of the existing radio group.

 Extern ID
Enter the extern ID for the Public Announcement zone. This ID will be
used when an announcement is sent to the PA zone from some
external system.
• Click the Subscribers tab.

 Select the desired PA units that will belong to the PA zone.

220 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.4.11 Alarm Management

The Alarm Management feature allows you to create rules for Alarms, Emails,
Notifications, Text Messages to radios, and other events. When a configured
rule is executed, the appropriate action(s) will start.
For example, an external application sends some text data, which contains the
text "alarm", to TRBOnet software. The text "Alarm" is configured as the rule to
start sending a predefined voice message (for example, "Alarm in Sector N") to
selected radios (for example, the group "firemen"). As a result, the group
"firemen" are notified about an emergency condition.
• Go to Administration (1), Alarm Management (2) to configure Alarm
Management rules:

• Click Add (3) to add a new Alarm Management rule.

Note: The administrator can also create a copy of the existing
Alarm Management rule. Select a rule in the list and
click the Create a Copy button. The system will create a
copy of the rule with the same configuration
parameters.

 Name
Enter a name for the alarm rule.
• On the Sources tab (1), click Add (2) to add an alarm source to the rule.

6.4 Administration 221

  Source
From the drop-down list (3), select the alarm source to add to the rule.
For a description of the alarm sources, see TRBOnet Enterprise/PLUS
Alarm Management User Guide.
Note: Select the alarm source you want to enable. In case no
source is selected, all configured alarm sources are
disabled by default.

• Click the Time Range tab to set the time at which the alarm rule will be
applied.
 All Time
Choose this option so that the rule will be valid all the time.
 Selected Time
Choose this option so that the alarm rule will be applied on the
selected days of the week at the selected time.
• Select the days of the week and specify the time ranges.
• Click the Location tab.
Under this tab, select the regions inside or outside of which the alarm rule
will be applied. You can also select the beacons in the coverage zone of
which the alarm rule will be applied.

222 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Note: When COM Port and/or External Network Connection

are selected as the alarm source, the Location rule
won’t be applied.

 Regions
Select Enable to add regions to the alarm rule.
• Radio Location
From the drop-down list, select whether the alarm rule will be
applied Inside Regions or Outside Regions.
• All Regions
Choose this option to apply the alarm rule inside/outside all map
regions.
• Selected Regions
Choose this option to apply the alarm rule only inside/outside
selected regions.
 Regions
In the list, select the region(s).
 Beacons
Select Enable to add beacons to the alarm rule.
• All Beacons
Choose this option to add all beacons to the alarm rule.
• Selected Beacons
Choose this option to add only selected beacons to the alarm rule.
 Beacons
In the list, select the beacon(s).
• Click the Actions tab (1) to set actions for the rule.
In the Actions list, the administrator can add and configure actions to be
executed when the events configured and selected in the Sources page
are triggered.
• Click Add (2) to add an action:

6.4 Administration 223

  Action Type
From the drop-down list (3), select the action type.
For a description of the action types, see TRBOnet Enterprise/PLUS Alarm
Management User Guide.
Note: After you configure the alarm rule, enable it by selecting
the check box beside it. In case when no alarm rule is
selected, the action will not be started.

224 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.4.12 Telemetry
On the Telemetry configuration page, you can configure settings for
Telemetry.
6.4.12.1 Radio Groups Telemetry
This is a default telemetry profile that is used to send telemetry commands to
radio groups.
• In the Administration pane, click Telemetry > Radio Groups Telemetry.
• In the Telemetry configuration pane, click Edit.

 Click Add and specify ID (VIO), Name, and Command (signal level).
Note: For Radio Groups Telemetry only the Digital Outputs
tab is available.

6.4.12.2 Adding Telemetry Profile for Radios

• Go to Administration (1), Telemetry (2), and click Add (3):

6.4 Administration 225

  Telemetry type
From the drop-down list, select one of the following types:
• MOTOTRBO – telemetry from Motorola radios.
• Socintech Novox – telemetry from Novox devices connected to the
radio via COM port.
• Swift Option Board – telemetry from the option board connected to
the radio.
• Sprite – telemetry from Sprite devices.
Note: Sprite telemetry profile can be read but not written.

 Profile name
Enter the name of the profile to display in the Dispatch Console.
 Click OK.

226 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Common tab
 Auto request input states
Select this option and in the Request interval box specify the time
interval, in seconds, to request input data.
 Trace digital inputs
Select this option to monitor digital input damages.
 Trace analog inputs
Select this option to monitor analog input damages.
 Replace state event to VIO events
Select this option to generate VIO ON/OFF event when the system
compares between the last and the current states of the VIO.
Note: Most of the policies are set to replace events, so it is
recommended to enable this option.

Digital Inputs tab

• Click Add to add a VIO (Virtual Input/Output) to the profile.

 ID
Select the VIO to set the parameters for.
 Name
Specify a name for the VIO to be displayed in the Dispatch Console.
 Event
Select the signal level of VIO events from the drop-down list. When an
event with the selected signal level occurs on the selected VIO, the
telemetry will be activated. The signal level must be the same in the
radio's codeplug and in Telemetry configuration in TRBOnet. It is a
programmable option that sets the pin's voltage level to High or Low
in order to trigger a selected functionality.
 Severity
Specify a severity level for the VIO event from the drop-down list.

6.4 Administration 227

  Display as subscriber state
Select this option so that the radio will change its status after it sends
the telemetry command.
 Auto reset state
Select this option to automatically reset the telemetry VIO after the
radio sends the telemetry command.
 Request location of subscriber
Select this option to request a GPS position of the radio after it sends
the telemetry command.
 Click Apply to apply settings to selected inputs.
Digital Outputs tab

• Click Add to add a VIO (Virtual Configured PIN) to the profile:

 ID
Select the VIO in the dropdown list to set its parameters;
 Name
Specify a name for the VIO to be displayed in the Dispatch Console.
 Command
Specify a signal level for the command to send to the selected VIO.
 Click Apply to apply settings to selected outputs.

6.4.13 Text Messages

On the Text Messages configuration page, you can configure settings for Text
Messages.
6.4.13.1 Group Text Messages
This is a default text message profile that is used to send text messages to
radio groups.
• Click Group Text Messages in the Administration pane.
• In the Text Messages configuration pane, click Edit.

228 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the dialog box that opens, change the desired parameters.

For a description of the profile parameters, see section 6.4.13.2, Adding
Text Message Profile.

6.4.13.2 Adding Text Message Profile

• Go to Administration (1), Text Messages (2), and click Add (3):

• In the Text Messages Profile dialog box, specify the following

parameters:
 Profile type
From the drop-down list, select one the two items:
• MOTOTRBO
Select if the radio itself is used to send/receive messages.
• Mobile Messenger (BT Accessory)
Select if the Bluetooth Communicator is used together with the
radio to send/receive messages.
 Profile name
Enter a name for the text profile.
 Click OK.

6.4 Administration 229

 • In the Text Messages Profile dialog box, specify the following
parameters:
 Profile Name
Enter a name for the profile.
 Data protocol
From the drop-down list, select one of the two items:
• MSI Proprietary
Select if the radio is equipped with a display and supports the new
Text Messaging service.
• DMR Standard
Select if the radio is equipped with a display and supports DMR
Compatible text messages.
 Route type
From the drop-down list, select one of the three items:
• Regular
Select this type to receive messages on the radio.
• Option Board
Select this type to receive messages on the radio's option board.
• Non-IP Peripheral
Select if the radio is connected to a PC via a USB port.
 Text Message format
From the drop-down list, select one of the pre-defined formats for text
messages, or select the Custom format.
 Custom Format
Enter your own format for text messages in this box if you have
selected 'Custom' from the list above. The Custom Format will default
to {Sender} | {Text}. There are four choices: {Sender}, {Text}, {Date},
and {Time}. Another example would be: {Date} | {Time} | {Text}.
 Max. message length
Enter the maximum number of characters that TRBOnet will send per
text message. The recipient of the text message may not be able to
receive the maximum number of characters due to its design
limitations. Therefore, it may only display a partial text message.
 Split long message into multiple messages
Select this option to allow single messages to be split into multiple
messages based on the Max. message length setting.

6.4.14 Request To Talk

This section describes how to configure the Request-To-Talk parameters.
• Go to Administration (1), Request To Talk (2).
• In the Request To Talk pane, click the Edit button.
• In the dialog box that opens, specify the following parameters:

230 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Show RTT notifications in a pop-up window

Choose this option so that Request to Talk messages will pop up over
the application window.

• Actions
In the drop-down list, select the buttons that will be available in the
pop-up box. If necessary, modify the button captions.

• The button captioned Accept means that an incoming RTT will be

immediately responded by the dispatcher.
• The button captioned Select PTT means that an incoming RTT will
not be responded to immediately. Instead, a dedicated PTT box
(Private Call, Group Call, or All Call, depending on what is chosen as
the callback destination) will be selected as the default PTT box, and
the callback transmission will start as soon as the external PTT
button is pressed.
• The button captioned Queue means that an incoming RTT will be
queued and can be processed later.

6.4 Administration 231

 • The button captioned Hide means that an incoming RTT will be
hidden for the dispatcher for the time period selected from the
drop-down list. Note that the RTT will be displayed for all other
dispatchers.
• The button captioned Reject means that an incoming RTT will be
rejected by the dispatcher and displayed for all other dispatchers.
• The button captioned Cancel means that an incoming RTT will be
rejected and not displayed for all other dispatchers.
 Add RTT to queue automatically
Choose this option so that all incoming requests to talk will be
automatically queued and can be processed later (see Activity Monitor
Panel, Requests To Talk tab).
 Show notification in the Windows tray
Select this option so that a notification will be displayed in the Windows
tray when a Request to Talk arrives.
 Apply RTT theme to PTT box
Select this option so that a special color theme (pink background, by
default) will be applied to the associated PTT box when a Request to
Talk arrives.
 Callback destination
From the drop-down list, select where to transmit when answering to a
request to call. You can select either Private Call, Home Group, Active
Group, All Call, or one of the registered Radio Groups.
Note: If the Home Group is selected, and the Home Group is
not specified for the radio that initiated a Request to
Talk, then the response to this Request to Talk will be
made as an All Call.

 Choose one of the following three options:

• Mark RTT as processed after dispatcher returns the call
Choosing this option means that a Request to Talk will be
considered processed after a dispatcher makes the return call.
• Mark RTT as processed after successful callback
Choosing this option means that a Request to Talk will be
considered processed only after the radio has responded to the
return call.
• Don’t automatically mark RTT as processed
Choosing this option means that a Request to Talk will be
considered processed only after a dispatcher manually marks it as
processed.
 Automatically delete RTT records after processing
Select this option to automatically delete RTT records after they are
processed.

232 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Expiration timeout
Enter the time, in minutes, during which unanswered requests to talk
will be stored.
On the Notifications tab, specify the following parameters:

 Send notifications to the caller

Select this check box to notify the radio when a request is rejected,
queued, or the dispatcher is unavailable.
• Choose one of the buttons below to specify the way the radio is
notified.
 Autodetect notification type
Choose this option button so that the type of notification will be
selected automatically depending on whether or not the Text
Messages Service is enabled on the radio.
 Send text messages
Choose this option button to send text notifications to the radio.
 Send voice messages
Choose this option button to send voice notifications to the radio.
• In the Text message notifications boxes, enter the corresponding
text notifications. These texts will be used when sending text
notifications to the radio.

6.4.15 Radio Statuses

In TRBOnet Dispatch Console, you can configure different profiles for the radio
statuses that are received from or sent to the radios.
• Go to Administration, Radio Statuses. You can see the default Radio
Status profile settings in the Radio Statuses pane.

6.4 Administration 233

 To add a Radio Status profile, click the Add button, and in the dialog that
opens, specify the required statuses to be received from the radios (Receive
tab) and sent to the radios (Send tab).

6.4.16 Location Profile

The Location Profile feature allows configuring different profiles of location
update settings for built-in GPS receiver. Location Profile overrides default
location trigger configuration in Server settings. For example, fire emergency
service has a number of departments in a city and needs to monitor current
position of radio subscribers (firemen). The administrator can create a number
of separate location profiles with different location tracking settings for each
department.

Note: The Location Profile feature is available for MOTOTRBO

Generation II radios, firmware version 2.4 or later.

• Go to Administration (1), Location Profile (2). You can see the default
Location Profile settings (3) in the Location Profile pane.

There is a default Location Profile that the administrator can use and edit.
The administrator can do the following:
1. Use default location profile.
2. Create a custom location profile: Add button.
3. Edit a profile: Edit button.
Note: In the default profile, the Name and Description
cannot be changed.

6.4.16.1 Adding a Location Profile

• In the Location Profile pane, click the Add button.

234 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Profile type
Select the Profile type (MOTOTRBO, FS 500, or Extended device).
 Profile name
Enter the name of the profile.
• In the Location Profile dialog box that opens, click the General tab.

• Name
Specify a name for the location profile.
• Description
Add a description for the location profile.
• Save GPS data to database
Select this option so that GPS data is saved in TRBOnet database.
• Manage trigger manually
Select this option so that GPS triggering can be started
(stopped/reset/reconfigured) only manually by the dispatcher.
• Channel type
From the drop-down list, select a radio channel for sending location data
to TRBOnet Server:
 Non-scheduled
This is a channel with regular GPS (Enhanced GPS not supported).
 Scheduled
This channel is available when the Enhanced GPS feature is configured
in the radio system.
 Non-scheduled with CSBK data
This channel allows using CSBK (Control Signaling Block) while
decoding.

6.4 Administration 235

  Scheduled with CSBK data
This is a channel with Enhanced GPS, which allows using CSBK (Control
Signaling Block) while decoding.
• Channel priority
From the drop-down list, select the channel that will be used by location
triggers when both LMR and broadband channels are available.
 Mixed Mode (Recommended)
Location triggers are used for broadband and LMR channel
simultaneously.
 Broadband Channel
Location triggers are used for the broadband channel if available, and
for the LMR channel if the broadband channel is not available.
 LMR Channel
Location triggers are used for the LMR channel if available, and for the
broadband if the LMR channel is not available.
Note: If you have entered the polling interval (Triggers tab,
Periodic trigger > Interval) that is not supported for
the selected channel, the closest larger value will be
used.

• Protocol type
From the drop-down list, select the protocol with which to send GPS data.
 LRRP (Location Request and Response Protocol)
 LIP (Location Information Protocol)
Note: The LIP protocol is supported on IPSC systems only.

• Positioning mode
This option determines which GPS coordinates to show on the map and
display in the radio's movement history when TRBOnet Server receives a
data packet containing both iBeacon and GPS data.
 iBeacon Indoor/Outdoor
The coordinates of the iBeacons will be positioned on the indoor and
outdoor maps.
Use case: When a person enters a building, the accuracy of
the GPS location reported by their radio is likely to
deteriorate. This may cause TRBOnet to show the
radio's location outside the building. Using
coordinates of iBeacons positioned on the floor
plan will prevent this from happening, and the
route travelled by the person will also be correct.
This is especially useful for reinforced concrete or
high-rise buildings.

236 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 iBeacon Indoor/GPS Outdoor

The coordinates of the iBeacons will be positioned on the indoor map
while the coordinates of the radio will be positioned on the outdoor
map.
Use case: This option is used to show the route travelled by
the person based on the GPS coordinates received
from their radio rather than from a detected
beacon, or when the speed and/or altitude of the
device are used for some purpose. The user's icon
will appear on the map twice, one icon will show
their actual GPS location, whereas the other icon
will appear over a detected beacon. Only iBeacon-
based location will be displayed on the floor plan.
When the radio's GPS coordinates become
unavailable, the user's icon will be displayed over
the detected beacon on both the map and the floor
plan.

 iBeacon Indoor/No Outdoor

Only iBeacon-based location tracking will be used, GPS coordinates of
radios and iBeacons will be ignored.
• GPS data
Select this option to enable the user to select what GPS readings to send
to TRBOnet Server. In the drop-down list, select which GPS data to include
in a packet.
• iBeacon data
Select this option to enable sending iBeacon data to TRBOnet Server. In
the drop-down list, select which iBeacon data to include in a packet:
 Major, Minor (included by default and cannot be disabled)
 UUID
iBeacon's Universally Unique Identifier
 TX Power, RSSI
The strength of the beacon's signal as seen on the receiving device.
• Number of iBeacons
Specify the number of the most recently detected iBeacons whose data
will be included in the data packet sent to TRBOnet.

6.4 Administration 237

 Triggers tab

• Periodic trigger
Select this option to set a periodic location trigger on a radio. The trigger
is a request to the radio to send its GPS and/or iBeacon data at the
specified time interval.
 Interval
Specify the location update interval, in seconds.
• Distance trigger
Select this option to allow receiving location updates by a distance:
 Distance
A radio will send location updates if the travelled distance exceeds a
specified distance from the last GPS point, in meters.
 Min. interval
A radio will send location updates no more than once within this time
interval, in seconds.
• Emergency Trigger
Select this option so that a radio will send GPS and/or iBeacon data upon
entering the emergency mode.
 Show emergency mode for Radio when Emergency GPS message is
received
Select this option if you want a Dispatch Console operator to see the
emergency status of a radio that transmitted location data.
• Telemetry trigger
Select this option so that a radio will send GPS and/or iBeacon data upon
sending a Telemetry command.
• Every PTT trigger
Select this option so that a radio will send GPS and/or iBeacon data every
time the PTT is pressed and held more than 5 seconds.

238 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Emergency PTT trigger

Select this option so that a radio will send GPS and/or iBeacon data every
time the PTT is pressed in the emergency mode.
To apply Location Profile to a radio:
• Go to Administration (1), Radios (2), select the radio in the table, and
click Edit (3):

 Click the General tab, and from the Location Profile list select the
location profile to use for the radio.
 Select/clear the Location Enabled check box to enable/disable the
location trigger.
Note: The Location Profile is only applicable when the 'Built-in
GPS receiver' or 'Extended device' (if any) is selected in
the Location Source.

6.4.17 Mobile Client Profile (TRBOnet Mobile)

The Mobile Client Profile feature allows configuring different location profiles
that can be applied to the Mobile Client app running on a smartphone. For
information on how to register a TRBOnet Mobile app, see section 6.4.32.1,

6.4 Administration 239

 Adding TRBOnet Mobile. For more details on TRBOnet Mobile, refer to TRBOnet
Mobile User Guide.
• Go to Administration, Mobile Client Profile (TRBOnet Mobile).
You can see the default TRBOnet Mobile Profile settings in the Mobile
Client Profile pane.

6.4.17.1 Adding TRBOnet Mobile Profile

• In the Mobile Client Profile pane, click the Add button.
• In the Mobile Client Profile (TRBOnet Mobile) dialog box, specify the
following parameters:
 Profile Name
Enter a name for the mobile client profile.
 Available Modes
In the drop-down list, select/deselect the features that will be available
to the associated Mobile Client.

• Click the Calls tab.

 Remote Monitor
If you select this option, the dispatcher will be able to activate the
mobile device's microphone in hidden mode.
Note: The Mobile Client app running on iOS 13 and later must
be in the foreground and the screen must be on for this
feature to work.

• Timeout
Specify the remote monitor duration, in seconds.
 Private Calls
Select this option to allow the Mobile Client app to make private calls.
In addition, you can select to allow:
• Half-Duplex Calls
• Full-Duplex Calls

240 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Group Calls
Select this option to allow the Mobile Client app to make group calls.
 Phone Calls
Select this option to allow the Mobile Client app to make and receive
phone calls.
 Allow Outgoing Calls
Select this option to allow the Mobile Client app to make outgoing
calls.

Note: If this option is cleared, the Mobile Client app will still be
able to send RTTs and respond to incoming radio calls
within the call hang time.

 Record audio on PoC devices

Select this option to save audio recordings on mobile devices running
the Mobile Client app.
 Delete all previous recordings on PoC devices
Select this option to delete all previous audio recordings from mobile
devices.
• Click the Location tab.
 Show locations of other devices
Select this option so that the Mobile Client app will receive locations of
other radios (mobile clients).
 Use GPS location
Select this option to enable sending GPS data to TRBOnet Server.
• Trigger interval
Specify the time interval, in seconds, that will be used to send GPS
location data.
• Emergency interval
Specify the time interval, in seconds, that will be used to send
emergency messages.
 Use Indoor location
Select this option to enable sending iBeacon data to TRBOnet Server.
• Trigger interval
Specify the time interval, in seconds, used to send iBeacon location
data.
• Emergency interval
Specify the time interval, in seconds, that will be used to send
emergency messages.
• Number of iBeacons
Specify the number of the most recently detected iBeacons whose
data will be included in the data packet sent to TRBOnet.

6.4 Administration 241

 • iBeacons filter
Click the Add link and enter the UUID of the beacons that will be
used by the mobile client.
Note: If you don't specify the iBeacon UUID, the Mobile Client
app running on an iOS device won't detect any
iBeacons.

• Positioning mode
This option determines which GPS coordinates to show on the map
and display in the device's movement history when TRBOnet Server
receives a data packet containing both iBeacon and GPS data.
 iBeacon Indoor/Outdoor
The coordinates of the iBeacons will be positioned on the indoor
and outdoor maps.
 iBeacon Indoor/GPS Outdoor
The coordinates of the iBeacons will be positioned on the indoor
map while the coordinates of the device will be positioned on the
outdoor map.
 iBeacon Indoor/No Outdoor
Only iBeacon-based location tracking will be used, GPS
coordinates of devices and iBeacons will be ignored.
• Click the Alarms tab.
 Emergency Button
Select this option so that the Mobile Client app will be able to send
Emergency Alarms to the Dispatch Console.
 Sensor Alerts
Select the desired sensor alert buttons (Man Down, No Movement,
Shake Detection) to be shown in the Mobile Client app.
 Show alarms from other devices
Select this option so that the Mobile Client app will receive alarms from
other radios (mobile clients).
 Allow users to enable or disable selected sensor alerts
Select this option so that the mobile app users will be able to enable or
disable selected sensor alerts.
Note: If this check box is cleared, the selected sensor alerts
will always be activated on mobile app devices and
cannot be deactivated by mobile app users.

• Click the Channels tab.

242 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 In the table, choose the Home Group channel on which the mobile app
will transmit if the user presses the PTT button (Home). You can also
check channels to be monitored (Monitor). To add/insert a channel
(Radio Group) to the table, click the Add/Insert link and specify the
Name, System and Group.
 Allow users to change Home Group
Select this option to allow users to change Home Group in their Mobile
Client apps.
 Allow users to select channels to monitor
Select this option to allow users to select the channels they can listen
to in their Mobile Client apps.
• Click the Extras tab.
 Battery Level
Select this option so that the smartphone's battery level will be sent to
the Dispatch Console.
Note: Mobile apps send the battery information as soon as
they are connected to TRBOnet. After successful
connection, mobile apps pass the battery level to the
server with every location update, voice transmission
and text message. Regardless of its activity, a mobile
app will update the battery charge level when it goes
down to 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%,
10%, 5%.

 Do Not Disturb
Select this option so that the DND mode will be enabled on the Mobile
Client app.

6.4.18 Mobile Client Profile (TRBO.SOS)

This section describes how to configure the profile for the TRBO.SOS
application running on a smartphone. For information on how to register a

6.4 Administration 243

 TRBO.SOS app, see section 6.4.32.2, Adding TRBO.SOS. For more details on
TRBO.SOS, refer to TRBO.SOS User Guide.
• Go to Administration, Mobile Client Profile (TRBO.SOS).
You can see the default TRBOnet SOS Profile settings in the Mobile Client
Profile (TRBO.SOS) pane.

6.4.18.1 Adding TRBO.SOS Profile

• In the Mobile Client Profile (TRBO.SOS) pane, click the Add button.
• In the Mobile Client Profile (TRBO.SOS) dialog box, specify the following
parameters:
• Profile Name
Enter a name for the TRBO.SOS profile.
• Click the Calls tab.
 Remote Monitor
If you select this option, the dispatcher will be able to activate the
device's microphone in hidden mode.
• Timeout
Specify the remote monitor duration, in seconds.
Note: The dispatcher won't be able to execute the
Remote Monitor command for TRBO.SOS apps running
in the background on iOS 13 and later.

• Click the Location tab.

 Use GPS location
Select this option to enable sending GPS data to TRBOnet Server.
• Trigger interval
Specify the time interval, in seconds, that will be used to send GPS
location data.
• Emergency interval
Specify the time interval, in seconds, that will be used to send
emergency messages.

244 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Click the TRBO.SOS tab.

 Show Call button

If you select this option, the PTT button will be available in TRBO.SOS.
• Call Action
From the drop-down list, select the action to be performed when the
PTT button is pressed: Request To Talk, TRBOnet Call, or Phone Call.
• Call Destination
From the drop-down list, select the call destination.
• Call button Name
Enter the name (label) of the PTT button.
 Show Lone Worker button
If you select this option, the Lone Worker button will appear in
TRBO.SOS. This will allow the TRBO.SOS user to start the Lone Worker
mode.
 Panic buttons
In the table below, specify the Type, Caption, Severity/Status, and
Custom Event for the additional button(s).
• Click the Alarms tab.
 Safety Alarms
Select the desired sensor alert buttons (Man Down, No Movement,
Shake Detection) to be shown in the TRBO.SOS app.
• Click the Channels tab.
 Home Group
Select the home group (System and Group) for the PTT button.
• Click the Extras tab.
 Battery Level
Select this option so that the smartphone's battery level will be sent to
the Dispatch Console.

6.4 Administration 245

 6.4.19 Mobile Client Profile (TRBOnet Communicator)
This section describes how to configure the profile for the TRBOnet
Communicator application running on a smartphone. For more details on
TRBOnet Communicator, refer to TRBOnet Communicator User Guide.

• Go to Administration (1) > Mobile Client Profile (TRBOnet

Communicator) (2).
• In the Mobile Client Profile (TRBOnet Communicator) pane, click Edit
(3).
• In the dialog box that opens, click the Add link.
• In the table below, specify the Type, Caption, Severity/Status, and Custom
Event for the button(s) you are adding.
• Once you have configured the profile, click OK.

6.4.20 Teltonika Profile

This section describes how to configure the profile for the Teltonika devices.
For information on how to register a Teltonika deice, see section 6.4.32.4,
Adding Teltonika. For more details on TRBOnet Teltonika, refer to TRBOnet
Teltonika User Guide.
• Go to Administration, Teltonika Profile.
You can see the default Teltonika Profile settings in the Teltonika Profile
pane.
• In the Teltonika Profile pane, click the Add button.

246 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Use GPS location

Select this option to enable sending GPS data to TRBOnet Server.
• Trigger interval
Specify the time interval, in seconds, that will be used to send GPS
location data.
 Use Indoor location
Select this option to enable sending iBeacon data to TRBOnet Server.
• Trigger interval
Specify the time interval, in seconds, used to send iBeacon location
data.
• Positioning mode
This option determines which GPS coordinates to show on the map
and display in the device's movement history when TRBOnet Server
receives a data packet containing both iBeacon and GPS data.
 iBeacon Indoor/Outdoor
The coordinates of the iBeacons will be positioned on the indoor
and outdoor maps.
 iBeacon Indoor/GPS Outdoor
The coordinates of the iBeacons will be positioned on the indoor
map while the coordinates of the device will be positioned on the
outdoor map.
 iBeacon Indoor/No Outdoor
Only iBeacon-based location tracking will be used, GPS
coordinates of devices and iBeacons will be ignored.
• Click the Additional tab.
 Battery Level
Select this option so that the Teltonika device's battery level will be
sent to the Dispatch Console.

6.4 Administration 247

 Note: Teltonika devices send the battery information as soon
as they are connected to TRBOnet. After successful
connection, Teltonika devices pass the battery level to
the server with every location update. Regardless of the
device activity, the battery charge level will be logged
on TRBOnet Server every time the level goes down to
90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and
5%.

 Emergency Button
Select this option so that the Teltonika device will be able to send
Emergency Alarms to the Dispatch Console.
 Man Down
Select this option to send Man Down alerts to the Dispatch Console.

6.4.21 Tools
On the Tools page, you can find some useful tools.

6.4.21.1 Templates for Extended Messages

The Templates can be used for Extended Messages and Extended Notes.
The Extended Messages feature is a special function allowing users to send
detailed preconfigured templates containing necessary information to each
other with the help of the special TRBOnet Dispatch Console application.
This service has been created especially for clients who need to use more
detailed and structured messages in their work. If the standard messages are
not enough to contain all required information, you may use the Extended
Messages service.
• Go to Administration (1), Tools > Templates (2) to create a new
template:

• Click Add From File (3) to add a template from a file.

248 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Note: Before adding a template from a file, save the created

template to a custom directory.

Select the directory where you saved the template and click OK to add the
file.
• Click Add (4) to create a new template:

 Name (1)
Specify a name for the template to display in the Dispatch Console (1).
 Elements (2)
Select elements to add to the template. Drag and drop the selected
element to the desired place on the mail template box.
 Template size (3)
Specify the template dimensions and background color.
 Click an element on the template. On the right side of the Template
dialog box, you can see the selected element properties.
For directions on how to send an extended message to a radio, see section
6.9.2.1, Send Extended Text Message to a Radio.
6.4.21.2 Indoor 2D Map Converter
TRBOnet Dispatch Console provides the Map Converter to use custom images
as Indoor 2D Floor plans. The tool allows converting images to the BMAP
format that is supported in Indoor Positioning.
• Click Administration (1), Tools > Indoor 2D Map Converter (2).

6.4 Administration 249

 • Name
Specify a name for the new Indoor 2D Map.
• Image
Click the ellipsis (…) button and locate the image file (PNG, JPG, TIFF, GIS)
on your computer.
• Directory
Click the ellipsis (…) button and locate the folder where to save the
converted Indoor 2D map on your computer.
• Click Start to convert the image.
To use the converted map
• Click Location Tracking (1). On the Map menu, click Open New Map in
Tab (2):

250 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• From the Map Type list box, select 'Beacon 2D'.

• Click Add to and browse for the map you have converted.
• Click OK to open the Indoor map in the Map pane.

6.4.22 Schedulers
The dispatcher can create pre-defined schedules to be used as event sources in
Alarm management, for database backup, and in job ticket templates.
• Go to Administration (1), Schedulers (2).
• In the Schedulers pane, click Add (3).

In the Scheduler dialog box, specify the following parameters:

 Name
Enter the name of the scheduler.
Recurrence Pattern
Choose one of the recurrence patterns for the scheduler:
 Days of Week
Specify the time and select the day(s) of the week.

6.4 Administration 251

  Monthly
Specify one of the following options:
• Specific Day
Specify the ordinal day of the month (in the range 1-31, or select
Last).
• Day of Week
Specify the week number in a month (in the range 1-4, or Last) and
select the day of the week.
 One time
Specify the date and time.
 Periodically
Specify the time interval, the repetition period (in
seconds/minutes/hours), and select the day(s) of the week.
Recurrence Range
 Start
Specify the start date/time.
 Stop
Specify the stop date/time.

6.4.23 Disabled Radios

TRBOnet Dispatch Console provides the Disable function that allows disabling
a radio even when the radio is offline. The system will disable an offline radio
as soon as it gets available.

Note: The dispatcher can disable a radio when they have

relevant Access Rights (for more details on adding and
editing dispatchers, see section 6.4.25, Dispatchers on
page 257).

• Go to Administration (1), Disabled Radios (2) to disable/enable selected

radio:

252 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Click Disable Radio (3) and in the dialog box that appears:

 Radio
From the drop-down list, select the radio to be disabled.
 Enable
Select the time period after which the radio will be enabled again.
 Reason
Enter the reason for disabling the radio.
 Click OK to disable the radio.

The Radio is added to the Disabled Radios list and is marked as Disabled
in the Voice Dispatch pane:

6.4 Administration 253

 • Click Enable Radio (4) to enable selected radio.
• Select a radio from the drop-down list and specify the reason to enable.
• Click OK to enable the radio.

6.4.23.1 Kill Radio

The Kill Radio feature is available only when a Capacity Max system is used.

Note: This operation is not reversible. If you kill a radio unit, it will be
impossible to recover it.

6.4.24 Dispatcher Groups

The administrator can add, edit, and delete dispatcher groups in the system.
• Go to Administration (1), Dispatcher Groups (2).

• Click Add (3) to add a dispatcher group.

254 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

On the General tab, specify general parameters for the new dispatcher group.
• Name
Specify a name for the dispatcher group to display in the Dispatch
Console.
• Description
Add a description for the dispatcher group.
On the Dispatch Group Call tab, specify the following parameters:

• Radio ID
Specify the Radio ID of the dispatcher group.
Phone Call
• User Extension
Enter the SIP extension number that will be used by the dispatcher group.

6.4 Administration 255

 • User Name
Enter the SIP user name that will be used by the dispatcher group.
• User Password
Enter the password for the dispatcher group to be authenticated by the
phone system.
On the Request to Talk tab, specify the parameters that will be used by radios
to request a call from the dispatcher group:

• Automatically by receiving Text Message from a radio

Select this option to request a call from the dispatcher group when a
radio sends a predefined text message. If you select this option, specify a
brief text message in the Message box.
• Automatically by receiving Telemetry Command from a radio
Select this option to request a call from the dispatcher group when a
radio sends a predefined telemetry command. If you select this option,
specify the VIO contact, and from the Command drop-down list, select
the signal level at which the user's radio should send the telemetry
command.
• Automatically by receiving DTMF command from a radio
Select this option to request a call from the dispatcher group when a
radio sends the specified DTMF tones. If you select this option, specify a
DTMF combination without the # characters in the Command box.
• Automatically by receiving Status from a radio
Select this option to request a call from the dispatcher group when a
radio sends the specified Status to TRBOnet Server, for instance, 1. If you
select this option, specify the Status.
Once you have added the dispatcher group to the system, the appropriate PTT
box will appear in the Radio Interface pane.

256 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.4.25 Dispatchers
The administrator can add, edit, and delete dispatchers in the system.
• Go to Administration (1), Dispatchers (2) to work with dispatchers:

• Click Add (3) to add a dispatcher.

• On the General tab, specify general parameters for the new dispatcher.
 Authentication
Select the Authentication method from the drop-down list.
Select TRBOnet Authentication to log on as a user registered in
TRBOnet Dispatch Console Users list.
Select Windows Authentication to log on using the PC name. The
system automatically shows the PC name as User Name.
Note: The password is not required when Windows
Authentication is used.

6.4 Administration 257

 Note: For more details on user access to Allocation Console,
see section 6.4.28, Users (page 265).

 User Name
Specify a user name for the dispatcher registered in TRBOnet Dispatch
Console Users list.
 Password
Specify a password for the dispatcher.
• Display Name
Specify a name for the dispatcher to display in the Dispatch Console.
• Description
Add a description for the dispatcher.
• Dispatcher Role
Form the drop-down list, select the role of the dispatcher in the system
(Administrator or Dispatcher).
Note: In addition to the Administrator and Dispatcher roles,
you can also create custom dispatcher roles. To do this,
in the Dispatchers pane, click the Roles tab, and then
click Add.

• Invisible to all other users

Select this option to make the dispatcher invisible to other users.
• Invisible to all except the assigned groups
Select this option to make the dispatcher invisible to other users except
for users belonging to the same group of dispatchers.
• Allow multiple simultaneous logons
Select this option to allow the dispatcher to use multiple instances of
Dispatch Console simultaneously.
On the Permissions tab, select the available modules and specify the available
permissions for the dispatcher.

258 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

On the Systems tab, specify the system(s) that will be available for the
dispatcher.

• All Systems are available

Choose this option to make all radio systems available for the dispatcher
to transmit and receive Voice and Data.
• Only selected Systems are available
Choose this option and specify which radio systems will be available to
the dispatcher.
 Select the check box in the left column to add the corresponding radio
system to the Radio Interface for the dispatcher.

6.4 Administration 259

  Select the check box in the TX column to allow the dispatcher to make
Voice calls using the corresponding radio system. When the check box
is cleared in the TX column, the dispatcher cannot use the
corresponding radio system to transmit voice and data.
On the Radio Groups tab, specify the radio groups that will be available for the
dispatcher.

• All groups are available

Choose this option to make all groups in the system available for the
dispatcher.
• Only selected groups are available
Choose this option and specify which radio groups will be available to the
dispatcher.
 In the list, select the groups to make them available for the dispatcher.
On the Logical Groups tab, select the logical groups that will be available for
the dispatcher.

260 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

On the Dispatch Call tab, specify Dispatch Call and SIP call settings for the
dispatcher:

• Radio ID
Specify the Radio ID of the dispatcher.
• Phone number
Specify the dispatcher's phone number (additional data).
• Email
Specify the dispatcher's Email (additional data).
Phone Call
 User Extension
Enter the SIP extension number that will be used by the dispatcher.
 User Name
Enter the SIP user name that will be used by the dispatcher.

6.4 Administration 261

  User Password
Enter the password for the dispatcher to be authenticated by the
phone system.
 Dial Plan
From the drop-down list, select the dial plan to use for the dispatcher.
On the Request to Talk tab, specify the parameters that will be used by radios
to request a call from the dispatcher:

• Automatically by receiving Text Message from a radio

Select this option to request a call from the dispatcher when a radio
sends a predefined text message. If you select this option, specify a brief
text message in the Message box.
• Automatically by receiving Telemetry Command from a radio
Select this option to request a call from the dispatcher when a radio
sends a predefined telemetry command. If you select this option, specify
the VIO contact, and from the Command drop-down list, select the signal
level at which the user's radio should send the telemetry command.
• Automatically by receiving DTMF command from a radio
Select this option to request a call from the dispatcher when a radio
sends the specified DTMF tones. If you select this option, specify a DTMF
combination without the # characters in the Command box.
• Automatically by receiving Status from a radio
Select this option to request a call from the dispatcher when a radio
sends the specified Status to TRBOnet Server, for instance, 1. If you select
this option, specify the Status.
On the Reports tab, specify the reports that will be available to the dispatcher.

262 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• All reports are available

Choose this option so that all the reports will be available to the
dispatcher.
• Only selected reports are available
Choose this option and in the list below select/deselect the reports to
include/exclude.

6.4.26 Email Groups

Email Groups are used in Alarm Management and Job Tickets configuration to
send emails to dedicated recipient groups.
• Go to Administration (1), Email Groups (2) to add/edit/delete email
groups in the system:

• Click Add (3) to create an email group.

6.4 Administration 263

  Name
Specify a name for the email group.
 Description
Add a description for the email group.
 Email list
Click Add to add an email address to the Email list.

6.4.27 SMS Groups

SMS Groups are used in Alarm Management configuration to send SMS to
dedicated SMS recipient groups.
• Go to Administration (1), SMS Groups (2) to add/edit/delete SMS groups
in the system:

• Click Add to create a new SMS group:

264 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Name
Specify a name for the SMS group.
 Description
Add a description for the SMS group;
 Phone Numbers
Click Add to add a phone number to the SMS group.

6.4.28 Users
The administrator can add/edit/delete users in the system. In addition, the
dispatcher can export/import users (see section 6.3.4.3, Exporting/Importing
Objects).
• Go to Administration (1), Users (2) to add/edit/delete users in the
system.

• Click either Add (3) to add a user to the system, or Edit (4) to edit the
selected user.
• On the General tab, set general parameters for the user:

6.4 Administration 265

  Login
Specify the login for the user.
 Password
Type in the individual password for the user.
 Display Name
Specify a name for the user to display in the Dispatch Console.
 Max number of radios
Select the maximum number of radios that the user can take.
 Description
Add a description for the user.
• On the Radios tab, specify the radios that will be available to the user.

 All radios
Choose this option to allow using all radios in the system.

266 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Selected radios
Choose this option and specify which radios will be available to the
user.
• On the Management tab, specify settings related to taking/returning
radios:

 Disable radio on return

Select this option so that a radio will be disabled after the users returns
it.
 Automatically return radio if it is offline
Select this option so that a radio will be automatically returned if it is
offline for the specified time interval.
• Timeout
Specify the offline timeout period, in minutes.
 Allow DTMF management
Select this option to allow taking/returning radios by sending the
specified DTMF tones.
• Take radio
Specify DTMF tones to be sent by the user to take a radio.
• Return radio
Specify DTMF tones to be sent by the user to return a radio.
 Allow Text Messages management
Select this option to allow taking/returning radios by sending specified
text messages.
• Take radio
Specify the text of the message to be sent by the user to take a
radio.

6.4 Administration 267

 • Return radio
Specify the text of the message to be sent by the user to return a
radio.
 Allow Sign In / Sign Out management
Select this option to allow taking radios when the user signs in to a
radio.
• Sign-in ID
Specify the password that the user enters to sign in when they take
a radio.
 Allow beacon management
Select this option and enter Major ID and Minor ID of the beacon that
will be used for taking and returning radios. When a radio
enters/leaves the range of the specified beacon, this radio will be
considered taken/returned by the user.
Note: This functionality is available only if the radio is
equipped with an option board.

 Send notification to radio after it is taken/returned

Select this option so that a notification is sent to a radio every time the
user takes or returns it.
 Enable forced check-in
This option affects the Radio Allocation module. If enabled, the user
will be able to return any radio, regardless of whether who has taken
the radio. For more details on the Radio Allocation module, refer to
TRBOnet Enterprise/PLUS Radio Allocation User Guide.
• On the SIP Account tab, specify a SIP Account for the user:

 User Extension
Enter the SIP extension number that will be used by the user.

268 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 User Name
Enter the SIP user name that will be used by the user.
 User Password
Enter the password for the user to be authenticated by the phone
system.
 Dial Plan
From the drop-down list, select the dial plan to use for the user.
 Block incoming phone calls
Select this option to block all incoming SIP calls for the user.
 Block outgoing phone calls
Select this option to block all outgoing SIP calls for the user.
• On the Logical Groups tab, specify logical groups for the user:
 In the list of available groups, select desired group(s).
 For more information about logical groups, see section 6.4.29, Logical
Groups (page 269).
• On the Custom Fields tab, specify the desired values for the custom fields
(see section 6.4.6, Custom Fields).

6.4.29 Logical Groups

TRBOnet Dispatch Console allows adding custom logical groups in addition to
radio groups. You can create groups and subgroups and then assign
radios/users/dispatchers to these groups.
• Go to Administration (1), Logical groups (2):

• Click Add (3) to add a logical group.

 Select Add as a Root to add a logical group as a root folder.
 Select Add as a Child to add a logical group as a child folder.

6.4 Administration 269

  Specify a Name and Description for the logical group.
 Click OK to add the logical group.
To display logical groups, enable the Logical Group view:

All created logical groups are displayed in the list of radios.

6.4.30 Radio Groups

• Go to Administration (1), Radio Group (2) to add/edit/delete Radio
Groups in the system.

270 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Click Add (3) to add a radio group to the system:

 Name
Specify a name for the radio group in the system.
 Group ID
Specify the Radio ID for the radio group used to identify messages
to/from the radio group.
 MDC / Select-5 / Quick Call I / Quick Call II
Set an ID for MDC 1200 or SELECT 5 signaling systems. This ID is used
to identify and communicate with a target radio or group of radios
depending on the call type. Or, select Quick Call I / Quick Call II
signaling system and specify the appropriate parameters.
 Description
Add a description for the radio group.

6.4 Administration 271

  Use custom Call Tone
Select this option and browse for the audio file (WAV) that will be used
as a custom tone when a group call is started by clicking the
Tone and PTT button in the group's PTT box (see section 6.5.2, PTT
Boxes).
 Use Broadcast mode for calls
Select this option so that a group call will be made in the Broadcast
mode. Receiving radios of this group call won’t be able to answer (talk
back) to this group call.
 Use Open Voice Channel mode for calls
Select this option so that a group call will be made in the Open Voice
Channel mode. All radios on the channel that are capable of receiving
OVCM calls will receive the group call rather than only the group
participants.
Notes: The Broadcast and OVCM group calls are available on
IPSC systems only. To use the Broadcast and OVCM
group calls, the Use NAI Voice option must be enabled
for the repeater (see section 5.9.2, Adding a MOTOTRBO
Repeater).

6.4.31 Device Lists

The Device Lists are used to dynamically group radios based on current needs.

6.4.31.1 Adding List Templates

• Go to Administration (1), Device Lists (2).
• In the Device Lists pane, select the List Templates tab, and click Add (3).

• In the List Properties dialog box, enter a name and description for the
list.
• Click the Radios tab (4), and select the radios (5) to include in the list.

272 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.4.31.2 Dynamic Regrouping

Note: The Dynamic Regrouping feature is available only for
Capacity MAX systems.

To assign radios to dynamic groups:

• Go to Administration, Device Lists.
In the Device Lists pane, select the Active Lists tab, and click Create.
Or:
• On the Tools menu, click Dynamic Regrouping.

In the Dynamic Regrouping dialog box, enter the following parameters:

 Action
From the list, select the action (Assign to, or Exclude from dynamic
group).
 Group
From the list, select the radio group to which to assign (or, from which
to exclude) radios.
 Group Alias
Enter an alias for the radio group.
 In the list below, expand the group and select the desired radios.
 Click the Execute button.

6.4.32 Radios
The administrator can add/edit/delete radios in the system. In addition, the
dispatcher can export/import radios (see section 6.3.4.3, Exporting/Importing
Objects).
• Go to Administration (1), Radios (2).

6.4 Administration 273

 • Click Add Digital Radio (3) to add a new radio.
On the General tab, specify general settings for the radio:

• Radio Name
Enter a descriptive name for the radio to display in the Dispatch Console.
• Radio ID
Enter a Radio ID for the radio. This ID is used by other calling radios when
addressing the radio, for instance, when making a private call or sending
a text message.
• MDC / Select-5 / Quick Call I / Quick Call II
Set an ID for MDC 1200 or SELECT 5 signaling systems. This ID is used to
identify and communicate with a target radio or group of radios
depending on the call type. Or, select Quick Call I / Quick Call II signaling
system and specify the appropriate parameters.
• Radio Groups
In the drop-down list, select a radio group(s) to which to assign the radio.

274 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Home Group
In the drop-down list, select a home group for the radio.
• Use icon
From the drop-down list, select an icon for the radio.
• Extended Device
From the drop-down list, select the option board type the radio is
equipped with.
Location Service
• Location Source
 Built-in GPS receiver
Select if the radio has its own built-in GPS receiver to send GPS data.
 Not equipped with GPS receiver
Select if the radio cannot send GPS data.
 Extended device
Select if the radio is equipped with an option board.
• Location Profile
From the drop-down list, select the default or preconfigured Location
Profile. For more details on Location Profiles, see section 6.4.16, Location
Profile (page 234).
 Location Enabled
Select/clear this check box to enable/disable the location trigger.
Telemetry Service
• TLM Source
 Not equipped with Telemetry
Select if the radio cannot send Telemetry data.
 Built-in Telemetry
Select if the radio has its own built-in Telemetry.
 Extended device
Select if the radio is equipped with an option board.
• TLM Profile
From the drop-down list, select the default or preconfigured Telemetry
Profile. For more details on Telemetry Profiles, see section 6.4.12,
Telemetry (page 225).
Text Messages Service
• TMS Source
 Not equipped with display
Select if the radio is not equipped with a display.
 Built-in Text Messages
Select if the radio has its own built-in Telemetry.

6.4 Administration 275

 • TMS Profile
From the drop-down list, select the default or preconfigured Text
Message Profile. For more details on Text Message Profiles, see section
6.4.13, Text Messages (page 228).
Job Tickets Service
• JTS Type
 None
Select if the radio is not equipped with a display.
 MSI Proprietary
Select if the radio is equipped with a display and supports the
Enhanced Job Ticket protocol.
 Text Messages
Select if the radio is equipped with a display and supports the legacy
Job Ticket protocol.
Radio Status Service
 RS Profile
From the drop-down list, select the default or preconfigured Radio
Status profile.
For more details on Radio Status profiles, see section 6.4.15, Radio
Statuses (page 233).
On the Logical Groups tab, specify logical groups for the radio:

• In the list of available groups, select desired group(s).

• For more information about logical groups, see section 6.4.29, Logical
Groups (page 269).
On the Additional tab, specify additional information about the radio
subscriber:

276 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Max speed
Specify the maximum speed allowed for the vehicle, in kilometers per
hour or in miles per hour, depending on the measurement system
specified in TRBOnet server.
• Route Color
Specify a color to display the route passed by the radio on the map.
• Load Image
Click this button and browse for the photo or image to assign to the
radio.
• In the table below, specify the desired values for the custom fields (see
section 6.4.6, Custom Fields).
Note: To automatically create and assign job tickets to the
radio (see section 6.4.5.17, HotSOS (Email)), there must
be present at least one field with the 'Email' type.

On the SIP Account tab, specify a SIP Account for the radio:

6.4 Administration 277

 • User Extension
Enter the SIP extension number that will be used by the radio.
• User Name
Enter the SIP user name that will be used by the radio.
• User Password
Enter the password for the authentication.
• Dial Plan
From the drop-down list, select the dial plan to use for the radio.
• Block incoming phone calls
Select this option to block all incoming SIP calls for the radio.
• Block outgoing phone calls
Select this option to block all outgoing SIP calls for the radio.
On the Cameras tab, select the check box beside the camera that will be
associated with the radio:

278 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Note: You can also register a radio from under the Unregistered
tab. Just select a radio and click Register:

6.4 Administration 279

 6.4.32.1 Adding TRBOnet Mobile
In addition to digital radios, you can create accounts for TRBOnet Mobile
Clients that can connect to your radio systems.
• Click Add TRBOnet Mobile.
In the TRBOnet Mobile dialog box, enter the following parameters:

 Radio Name
Enter a descriptive name for the Mobile Application user to display in
the Dispatch Console.
 Login
Enter the login for the Mobile Client app user.
 Password
Enter the password for the Mobile Client app user to be authenticated
by the TRBOnet system.
 Radio ID
Specify a Radio ID for the Mobile Client user. This ID is used by other
calling radios when addressing the Mobile Client user, for instance,
when making a private call or sending a text message.
 Profile
In the drop-down list, select the profile for the mobile client.
Or, click the plus button on the right to create a profile.
Note: For directions on how to create/edit a Mobile Client
Profile, see section 6.4.17.1, Adding TRBOnet Mobile
Profile.

280 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.4.32.2 Adding TRBO.SOS

In addition, you can create accounts for TRBO.SOS applications that can
connect to your radio systems.
• Click Add TRBO.SOS.
In the TRBO.SOS dialog box, enter the following parameters:

 Radio Name
Enter the descriptive name of the TRBO.SOS user to display in the
Dispatch Console.
 Login
Enter the Login that will be used by the TRBO.SOS user. Note that this
is a case-sensitive value.
 Password
Enter the password for the authentication.
 Profile
Select the location profile for the mobile client. See section 6.4.18.1,
Adding TRBO.SOS Profile.

6.4 Administration 281

 6.4.32.3 Adding WAVE Radio
If the WAVE 5000 Controller and/or WAVE OnCloud Gateway is connected, you
can add WAVE radios to your radio systems.
• Click Add WAVE 5000 or Add WoC Radio (depending on to which WAVE
system the radio is being added).

In addition to Radio ID, the WAVE radio has the Wave ID parameter.
 Radio ID
Specify a Radio ID for the WAVE radio. This ID is used by other calling
radios when addressing the radio, for instance, when making a private
call or sending a text message.
 WAVE ID
Enter the Wave ID that corresponds to the user registered in the WAVE
server's user database.

282 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.4.32.4 Adding Teltonika

You can also add Teltonika devices.
• Click Add Teltonika.
On the General tab, specify general settings for the Teltonika device:

 Radio Name
Enter a name for the Teltonika device.
 IMEI
Enter the Teltonika device’s IMEI number.
The IMEI number is on the barcode sticker next to the serial number.
You can also see the IMEI number in Teltonika Configurator.
 Radio ID
Enter the Radio ID of the device.
 Profile
Select the profile for the Teltonika device. See section 6.4.20, Teltonika
Profile.
To see the IMEI and Telnonika Profile columns in the table of registered
devices, right-click on the table header, and from the context menu select
Column Chooser. In the list of available columns, select the column and drag it
to the desired position in the table.

6.4 Administration 283

 6.5 Voice Dispatch
When on the Voice Dispatch tab is selected, the dispatcher can make radio and
phone calls, send text messages to radios and phone numbers, monitor recent
calls and events, radio state, active tasks and routes and view selected map.

6.5.1 Radio List

6.5.1.1 View Options
The toolbar in the upper part of the Radio List pane provides buttons to change
the appearance of the list:

• Click to view radios by radio list.

• Click to view radios by their states.

 Yellow
A radio is online and enters the beacon coverage zone; has Indoor
positioning lock.
Note: When GPS location is available and the radio enters the
beacon coverage zone, the state will turn yellow from
green.

 Blue
A radio is online; GPS data is not available.
 Green
A radio is online; GPS data is available. This state is shown if the Server
has received GPS data during the last 30 seconds (the time interval is
set in Location Profile > Periodic trigger interval).
 Grey
A radio is offline.

• Click to view radios by radio groups.

• Click to view radios by logical groups.

284 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Click , and select the radio list elements that will be displayed in the
Radio List pane.

 Click the arrow button (1).

 Select the object types and the radio states (2) to filter radios.
For example, you may select to display only radios and radio groups
that are online and have fixed GPS signal.
 Click OK (3) to apply filter settings.

• Click , and from the drop-down list, select how to sort the radios in the
Radio List (Name, Radio ID, State).

• Click to open the Quick Actions dialog box to specify which quick
buttons to display in the Radio List pane.

 Dispatcher Buttons
In this group, select the quick buttons to be displayed in the Radio List
for dispatchers.
 Radio Buttons
In this group, select the quick buttons to be displayed in the Radio List
for radios.

6.5 Voice Dispatch 285

  Radio Groups Buttons
In this group, select the quick buttons to be displayed in the Radio List
for radio groups.
 Logical Group Buttons
In this group, select the quick buttons to be displayed in the Radio List
for logical groups.
Note: For the preview, see the lower part of the Settings
dialog box.

 Additional Options
• Use Check Box Filtering
Select this option to display check boxes next to each radio and
radio group. Selecting/clearing a check box will display/hide the
corresponding radio/radio group on the map.
• Show Status of Location Trigger
Select this option to display the Location trigger state for a radio in
the Radio List pane.

 Grey
A radio is offline.
 Blue + white dish
A radio sent ARS but didn't send GPS packets.
 Blue + red dish
A radio sent ARS and GPS packets without GPS data, that is the
radio is out of GPS coverage.
 Green
A radio is fully online (has a GPS fix).
6.5.1.2 Quick Filter
Type in Radio ID or Radio name to filter the Radio List. Search results are
displayed in the Radio List pane:

286 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.5.1.3 Radio Information Tooltip

The dispatcher can see the last received radio data in the Radio information
tooltip. Select a radio in the Radio List and hover the mouse pointer over it:

The following information on the radio is displayed in this tooltip:

1. The current channel/radio system the radio is on.
2. The radio status (displayed only if the Show latest note in Unit
information details option is selected in the Advanced tab of the
Options dialog).
3. The current battery level, in percent (displayed only if the radio is
equipped with an option board).
4. The User Activity list the radio is assigned to, if a User Activity task is
activated.
5. The Lone Worker policy's state, if a Lone Worker task is activated.
6. The route assigned to the selected radio, if a Route Management task is
activated for the selected radio.
7. The associated job tickets.
8. The current GPS data and current location data.
9. The current location resolved to address.
While this pop-up window is open, the dispatcher can do the following:
• Click to request the presence of the radio in the radio network.
• Click to send a text message to the radio.
• Click to request the radio's location.

6.5.1.4 Radio Shortcut Menu

To open the radio's shortcut menu, right-click a radio in the Radio List pane:
This shortcut menu contains the following items:
• Check Presence
Choose this menu item to send a Radio Check command. If the radio is
online and is located in the coverage area, the dispatcher will see a
message like this:

6.5 Voice Dispatch 287

 • Private Call
Choose this menu item to initiate a Private PTT Call to the selected radio.
• Phone Call/ Full-Duplex Call
Choose this menu item to initiate a phone call (full-duplex call) to the
selected radio.
• Request to Talk
Choose this menu item to send a talk request to the selected radio.
• Request Location
Choose this menu item to request the location of the selected radio (for
radios with GPS module only).
• Send Message
Choose this menu item to send a text message to the selected radio (for
radios with display only).
 In the dialog box that appears, specify the radio/radio
group/dispatcher to send the text message to.
• Advanced > Remote Monitor (Open mic)
Choose this menu item to activate the radio microphone in hidden mode
(remote monitor duration – 30 sec.)
• Advanced > Reset Location Trigger
Choose this menu item to customize the Location Update settings. When
you reconnect to the Server or reassign a Location Profile to the radio,
temporary settings will be updated to the Location Profile settings.

 Reset/Stop/Start location trigger

Choose which command to send to the radio.

288 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Change periodic interval

Select this option and specify the new location update interval.
• Advanced > Enable Radio
Choose this menu item to enable the selected radio.
• Advanced > Disable Radio
Choose this menu item to disable the selected radio.
• Advanced > Exit from Emergency mode
Choose this menu item to cancel the Emergency mode on the selected
radio.
Note: This command is distinct from the Clear Alarm
command ("x" button on the Alarm box) which just
clears the radio's alarm state in the Dispatch Console.
Also note that this command is applicable when the
radio is used in Capacity MAX or DIMETRA Express
systems only.

• Advanced > Send Audio Record

Choose this menu item to send an audio record to the selected radio.

 Click Start and start talking to the microphone.

 Click Send to send the recorded message to the radio.

 You can also load your message from file, or from Saved Audio Files.
Just click the Load button.
 Or, you can send a text message converted to speech. Just click the
Convert Text to Speech link.

• Advanced > Send Push Notification

Choose this menu item to send a push notification to the selected radio.

6.5 Voice Dispatch 289

  In the dialog box that appears, specify the radio/radio group to send
the push notification to.
Note: This menu item appears only if the radio is a mobile
client app running on a smartphone.

• Advanced > Send Coordinates To

Choose this menu item to send the coordinates of the selected radio to
selected recipients.

 In the dialog box that appears, specify the radio/radio

group/dispatcher to send the coordinates to.
• Advanced > Send Email
Choose this menu item to send an Email message to the mailbox
associated with the selected radio.
• Advanced > Hot Key - Private Call
Choose this menu item to assign a hot key that will be used to make a
private call to the selected radio. When the prompt appears, press the
desired key or key combination.

• Find on Google Earth

Choose this menu item to display the selected radio location on Google
Earth.
• Show Route on Google Earth
Choose this menu item to display a route traveled by the selected radio
on Google Earth for the specified time period.

290 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Track Radio > Track in New Window

Choose this menu item to open a new Map window for the selected radio.
• Track Radio > Video Tracking in New Window
Choose this menu item to open a new window with the IP camera(s) that
will track the selected radio. The camera may be associated with the
selected radio and/or with the beacon(s) when the radio enters the range
of the beacon(s).
• Track Radio > Google Street View
Choose this menu item to open Google Street View with the latest
location and direction of the selected radio.
• Track Radio > Yandex Street View
Choose this menu item to open Yandex Panorama with the latest location
and direction of the selected radio.
• Set Location Profile
Click this menu item and select the location profile that will be associated
with the radio.
• Specify State Colors
Choose this menu item to select to set individual parameters for the radio
icons.

6.5 Voice Dispatch 291

  In the State Colors dialog box, you can specify icons for the states of
the selected radio. Select icons from the drop-down list. To set a
custom color for the radio state icon, click the + button and select a
color in the uniform color palette. Click the – button to delete a custom
color.
 In the lower part of the dialog box, you can see the preview of the
icons.
 To set default icons for the selected radio, click the Reset button.
• Set Radio Channel > Radio Active
Select/deselect this menu item to make the selected radio active/inactive.
• Set Radio Channel > Channel
Select the radio channel over which to make calls to the selected radio.
• Cameras >
Click this menu item and select a camera associated with the radio. As a
result, a new window with the camera view will open.
• Set On Duty
Choose this menu item to assign the selected radio to the On Duty list.
See also section 6.4.5.7, User Activity (page 183).

6.5.2 PTT Boxes

The dispatcher can make voice calls from the Dispatch Console by using PTT
boxes:

The following options are available for the PTT box:

• Click the button to make the channel the default PTT channel.
• Click the (Tone and PTT) button to start transmitting after a tone
sound.
• Click the (Solo) button to mute all channels except this one.
• Click the (Mute) button to mute this channel.
Right-click on the selected PTT box to display the shortcut menu which contains
the following commands:
• Default PTT channel
Select this menu item to make the channel the default PTT channel.

292 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Specify Hot Key

Choose this menu item to assign a hot key that will be used to transmit
on this radio channel. When the prompt appears, press the desired key.
• Specify External PTT
Select the external PTT device that will be associated with this PTT box.
• Specify External Indicator
Select the external PTT indicator that will be associated with this PTT box.
• Add to New Group
Choose this menu item to add the channel/group associated with the
selected PTT box to the Patch box. When two or more channels/groups
are added to the Patch box, the dispatcher can click the Create link to
create a patch group for the selected channels/groups.
• Tone and PTT
Click this menu item to start transmitting after playing a tone sound.
• Mute this channel
Click to mute the selected channel.
• Mute all channels except this
Click to mute all channels except the selected one.
• Volume
Move the slider to specify the speaker volume level on the selected
channel/group.
• Microphone
Move the slider to specify the microphone volume level on the selected
channel/group.
• Configure channel
Click this menu item and, in the dialog box that opens specify the
recorder, player, speaker, external PTT device, etc.

• Open Voice Channel Mode

This option is available for Private PTT Boxes. If you select this mode, all
radios on the channel that are capable of receiving OVCM calls will receive
this call rather than only the designated call recipient.

6.5 Voice Dispatch 293

 Notes: The OVCM calls are available on IPSC systems only. To
use the OVCM calls, the Use NAI Voice option must be
enabled for the repeater (see section 5.9.2, Adding a
MOTOTRBO Repeater).

• Select By Radio ID Mode

Select this mode to allow making calls by entering radio IDs from the PTT
box.
• Recipient
Select the call recipient for the PTT box.
• Terminate Transmission
Click this menu item to terminate the current transmission.
Note: The incoming transmission can also be interrupted and
terminated by clicking the Interrupt button in the PTT
box.

• Reset
Click this menu item to reset connection to the selected channel/group.
• Minimize/Restore
Click to minimize/restore the PTT box size.

6.5.3 Voice Calls

The dispatcher can make the following types of calls:
• Private Call
This is an individual call from the Dispatch Console to a radio via the radio
channel.
• All Call
This is a call from the Dispatch Console to all radio groups registered in
the system.
• Group Call
This is a call from the Dispatch Console to a selected radio group
registered in the system.
• Intercom Call
This is a call from the Dispatch Console to other dispatchers. There are
three types of Intercom Call:

294 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Intercom Call to all dispatchers

 Group Intercom Call to a group of dispatchers
 Private Intercom Call to a selected dispatcher
• Phone Call
This is a call from the Dispatch Console to a selected phone number.
In addition, the dispatcher can send voice mails to offline radios.

6.5.3.1 Private calls

The dispatcher can make a call to any online radio registered in the system. To
make an individual call from the Dispatch Console to a selected radio via the
radio channel, do the following:
• Select the radio in the Radio List.

• Click the button on the right.

Or:
• Right-click the radio in the Radio List.
• On the drop-down menu, click Private Call.
To terminate a private call, do the following:
• Click the PTT button on the PTT box.
Or:

• Click the button in the Radio list.

Note: You can also create a special PTT box for Private Calls. For
more details, see View > Configure PTT Boxes on page 109.

Full-Diplex calls
The dispatcher can also make full-duplex calls (phone calls) to online radios. To
make a full-duplex call from the Dispatch Console to a selected radio, do the
following:
• Select the radio in the Radio List.

• Click the button on the right.

Or:
• Right-click the radio in the Radio List.
• On the drop-down menu, click Full-Duplex Call.
See also section 6.5.9, Phone Calls.
6.5.3.2 All calls
The dispatcher can make a call to all online radios registered in the system (for
example, in the case of alarm). To make a call from the Dispatch Console to all
radios registered in the system, do the following:
• From the drop-down list, select All Call.

6.5 Voice Dispatch 295

 • Click the PTT button.

6.5.3.3 Group calls

To make a call from the Dispatch Console to a selected radio group registered
in the system, do the following:
• From the drop-down list, select a group.

• Click the PTT button.

Note: You can also create a special PTT box for Group Calls. For more
details, see View > Configure PTT Boxes on page 109.

6.5.3.4 Intercom calls

The dispatcher can make calls to all dispatchers or to selected dispatchers in
the system. To make an Intercom Call to dispatchers, do the following:
• On the Intercom PTT box, from the drop-down list, select either All Call, or
a group of dispatchers, or an individual dispatcher.

• Click the PTT button.

296 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.5.4 Predefined Voice Messages

The dispatcher can send predefined voice messages (recorded or voice
messages, or audio files) to a radio or a selected radio group:

• In the Queued Messages panel, click the Voice Message button.

• In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.

6.5.5 Patches
6.5.5.1 Predefined Patch
The Patch function allows configuring the network to redirect calls. A
predefined Patch can be created by the administrator only (see section 6.4.3.1,
Radio Bridge) and a dispatcher cannot configure it. A predefined Patch is
displayed in the Patch panel by default. The Patch feature is intended to
combine different radio channels in a single group to make voice calls from a
dispatcher to radios and from radios to a dispatcher (for example, to connect a
dispatcher with the firemen and cleaners).

6.5 Voice Dispatch 297

 6.5.5.2 Custom Patch
The dispatcher can create a custom Patch to connect selected PTT boxes (for
example, the Emergency and Firemen radio groups). In addition, you can
connect analogue and digital radios via a Patch.

1. In the Radio Interface pane, click the desired PTT boxes and drag and
drop them, one after another, to the empty Patch box (1).
2. Click the Create link (2) to create a custom Patch.
Note: Until you click the Create link, this patch will remain as
a temporary patch that will be deleted after you
reconnect to TRBOnet Server or restart TRBOnet
Dispatch Console.

As a result, the new patch will be added to the Patch panel.

 Click the Activate button (1) to activate the patch.
 Click the check box on the left (2) to make the patch selected (default)
so that the external PTT button can be used to start transmission.

298 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.5.6 Quick Commands

The dispatcher can create Quick Commands (Text Messages, Send Telemetry,
Request Location, Send Voice Message, and some other commands) and
display the Quick Commands panel in the Radio Interface pane. With these
commands, the dispatcher can quickly send Text Message, Telemetry, Location
Request, Voice Message, and some other commands to a radio by clicking the
appropriate Quick Command button.
To configure the Quick Commands panel, do the following:
• Make sure Show Quick Commands Panel (2) is selected under the View
menu.
• On the Quick Commands panel, click the Configure link (3).

• In the Configure Quick Commands dialog box, click the Create link.

6.5 Voice Dispatch 299

  Name
Specify a name for the quick command. This name will be displayed as
the button name in the Quick Commands panel.

6.5.6.1 Send Text Message

 Command
From the drop-down list, select Send Text Message.
 Message
Enter the text of the message.
 Send to Radio
Choose this option to send a predefined text message to individual
radios registered in the system. In the Recipient box, select target
radios.
 Send to Radio Group
Choose this option to send the text message to radio groups
registered in the system. In the Recipient box, select target groups.

300 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.5.6.2 Send Telemetry

 Command
From the drop-down list, select Send Telemetry.
 VIO
Specify a VIO to which to send a telemetry command.
 Command
From the drop-down list, select a telemetry command for the selected
VIO.
 Send to Radio Group
Choose this option to send the telemetry command to radio groups
registered in the system. In the Recipient box, select target groups.
 Send to Radio
Choose this option to send the telemetry command to individual radios
registered in the system. In the Recipient box, select target radios.

6.5 Voice Dispatch 301

 6.5.6.3 Request Location

 Command
From the drop-down list, select Request Location.
 Recipient
Select radios to which to send a location request.

6.5.6.4 Send Voice Message

 Command
From the drop-down list, select Send Voice Message.
 Load from file
Click this link and locate the audio file on your PC.
 Record Message
Click this link to record a new voice message.

302 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Play back message

Click this link to play back the voice message.
 Specify Call Type, Channel, and Call Target for a voice message.
Note: To send a Voice Message to a subscriber from the
phone book, click the ellipsis (…) button in the Call
Target column and select a contact from the phone
book.

 Priority
From the drop-down list, select the priority with which the voice
message will be sent/queued. If this priority is higher than that of the
current transmission, which is, in turn, allowed to be interrupted, the
current transmission will be interrupted and the voice message will be
sent instead.

6.5.6.5 Send Signaling

 Command
From the drop-down list, select Send Signaling.
 Radio System
From the drop-down list, select the radio system.
 Target
From the drop-down list, select the target group to which the signal
will be sent.
 Type
From the drop-down list, select the signaling system type (Quick Call I,
Quick Call II, DTMF, or Custom).
If the Custom type is selected, specify the Frequency 1, Frequency 2,
Duration, and Pause for the signal to be sent.

6.5 Voice Dispatch 303

 6.5.6.6 Send Command to Control Station

 Command
From the drop-down list, select Send command to Control Station.
 Click Add
• Control Station
From the drop-down list, select the Swift Agent connected to
TRBOnet Server.
• Command
From the drop-down list, select the PIN number and its value.

6.5.6.7 Request To Talk

 Command
From the drop-down list, select Request To Talk.

304 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Send to Radio Group

Choose this option to send the request to talk to radio groups
registered in the system. In the Recipient box, select target groups.
 Send to Radio
Choose this option to send the request to talk to individual radios
registered in the system. In the Recipient box, select target radios.

6.5.6.8 Custom Event

 Command
From the drop-down list, select Custom Event.
 Event ID
Specify the event ID.

6.5.6.9 Send Swift Command

 Command
From the drop-down list, select Send Swift Command.
 Swift Command
From the drop-down list, select the appropriate Swift command.
Enter the required parameters, if any.
 Send to Radio Group
Choose this option to send the Swift command to radio groups
registered in the system. In the Recipient box, select target groups.
 Send to Radio
Choose this option to send the Swift command to individual radios
registered in the system. In the Recipient box, select target radios.

6.5 Voice Dispatch 305

 6.5.6.10 Send Push Notification

 Command
From the drop-down list, select Send Push Notification.
 Subject
Enter the subject of the notification. Click the button on the right, and
select the message severity (Information, Warning, or Alarm).
 Message
Enter the notification message to be displayed.
 Send to Dispatcher Group
Choose this option to send the push notification to dispatcher groups
registered in the system. In the Recipient box, select target dispatcher
groups.
 Send to Radio
Choose this option to send the push notification to individual radios
registered in the system. In the Recipient box, select target radios.

6.5.7 Queued Messages

This feature enables dispatchers to send audio messages even if the channel is
currently busy. The dispatcher records a message to be sent to a busy channel
and then TRBOnet automatically forwards this message as soon as the channel
becomes available:

306 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

To queue an audio message for delivery to the selected recipients, first record
a message by clicking the Record button. Alternatively, you can select a WAV
audio file from any storage location, or select a prerecorded message from the
library.
6.5.7.1 Select Audio File
• Click File > Open Audio File and browse for the audio file on the local PC.

6.5.7.2 Audio Message Library

You can select an audio file from the Voice Message templates.
• Click File > Audio Message Library.

• Select an audio file in the list and click OK to use this file as a queued
Voice Message.

6.5 Voice Dispatch 307

 6.5.7.3 Record Audio File
You can record a voice message that can be sent to selected radios.
• Click Record > Record audio to open the recording tool:

 Click Start and start talking to the microphone.

 Click Stop to stop recording the message.

 Click Send to send the recorded message immediately.

 Click Save > Save as file to save the recorded file as an audio file on
the PC.
Or:
 Click Save > Save as Saved Audio File to add the recorded file to a list
of the Saved Audio Files.

6.5.8 Activity Monitor Panel

While in this panel, the dispatcher can perform a wide range of tasks, including:
• Monitoring and listening to recent calls and viewing system events
• Monitoring selected radio state
• Monitoring active tasks for selected radio
• Monitoring active routes for selected radio
• Enabling and disabling User Activity monitoring
• Displaying selected map in a compact view mode
• Monitoring cameras connected to Dispatch Console

6.5.8.1 Recent Calls/Events

In the Recent Calls/Events tab, the dispatcher can monitor recent Server
events, view and listen to recent calls.

308 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Voice Recording
Play back selected call(s)
• Select the voice call recording you want to play back and click the
button on the left of the toolbar.
The Audio player box will appear.

 Click the Play button to play back the recording.

Click the Pause button to make a pause.
Click the Stop button to finish playing back the recording.
Click the Open button to select a new audio file to play back.
Note: You can play back multiple recordings in a row. Use the CTRL
and/or SHIFT keys to select multiple recordings you want to
play back. Then click the button.

Save selected call(s)

• Select the voice call recording (or multiple recordings, with the help of
CTRL/SHIFT keys) you want to save as an audio file.

6.5 Voice Dispatch 309

 • Click Save > Save Selection as Individual Files to save selected
recordings in separate files.
Or
• Click Save > Save Selection as Single File to save selected recordings in a
single file.
• In the Save As or Browse For Folder dialog box, browse for the folder
where you want to save the file(s).
Recent Calls/Events Toolbar

Click the Pause button to pause updating the Recent Calls/Events log.
Click the Clear button to clear the Recent Calls/Events log records.
Click the Reload button to reload all log records.
Click the Filter By Radio button to filter log records by a selected radio/radio
group. In the Radio List pane (the upper-left-pane of the main window), select a
radio or radio group. The Recent Calls and Events for a selected radio will only
be displayed in the Recent Calls/Events pane.
Click the Grouping button to group log records. Select the column you want to
group log records by. Drag and drop the selected column header to the
Grouping field.
Click the Auto Filter button to set a filter for the recent calls and events. You
can filter the Recent Calls/Events list by any parameter. For example, to filter
the list by a selected Sender, select the Sender column (1), and start typing the
sender name (2).

Click the Default Settings button to apply default settings to all log records.
Click the Details button to see voice call participants:

Click the Show Notes button to enable the Note column. All notes added by
the administrator and dispatchers for the recent calls and events will be shown
in the Notes column. So, you can mark recent calls and events to later find
them by notes.

310 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Click the Add Note button to add a note for the selected recording and/or
event. The notes will be displayed in the Recent Calls/Events log if the
Show Notes button stays pressed.
Click the Add Event button to add an event to the Recent Calls/Events log.

 Destination
Select either All or an individual dispatcher if you want to see the
message.
 Severity
Select the severity level to inform dispatchers about the level of
importance.
 Description
Enter the event description.
 Click OK.
As a result, the event will be added to the Recent Calls/Events pane.

6.5.8.2 Recent Calls

Note: The Recent Calls tab is not displayed in the Active Monitor
panel by default. To view this tab, go to View > Additional
Tabs, and select the Recent Calls item.

On the Recent Calls tab, the dispatcher can see and configure the latest Voice
calls, including Private, Group, and Intercom calls:

• Click the Private button (1) to display the latest Private calls.
• Click the Group button (2) to display the latest Group calls.
• Click the All Call button (3) to display all call types, including Intercom
calls.
In a Call Box, you can see the number of calls and the last call date and time:

6.5 Voice Dispatch 311

 Click the button to start a Private call to the Sender-Radio (Radio is
displayed in the Sender column).

Click the button to mark the calls as viewed.

Click the button to clear the recent call history.

6.5.8.3 Requests To Talk

On the Requests To Talk tab, the dispatcher can see Missed Calls and Requests
To Talk:

Types
• Click the Missed Call button to display Missed Calls.
• Click the Request to Talk button to display Requests To Talk.
View
• Click the Table button to display calls in a table view.
• Click the Cards button to display calls as a set of cards.
• Click the Clear button to clear all the records.
• Click the Filter button to set a filter for the records. You can filter the
records by any parameter. For example, to filter by the caller select the
Caller column, click in the empty row and start typing the caller name.
• Click the Options button to specify options related to Request to Talk:
For a description of the Request-To-Talk options, see section 6.4.14,
Request To Talk.
From within the Request To Talk table, you can do the following:

• Click the button to start a private call to the call request sender.
• Click the Finish ( ) button to mark the RTT as processed and remove it
from the table.
• Click the Reject ( ) button to reject the RTT for the dispatcher. Note
that the RTT will be displayed for all other dispatchers.
• Click the Menu ( ) button and from the drop-down list select one of
the following commands:

312 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Click the Forward ( ) command to redirect the RTT to a different

dispatcher/ dispatch group.
 Click the Hide ( ) command to hide the RTT for the dispatcher for the
time period selected from the drop-down list. Note that the RTT will be
displayed for all other dispatchers.
 Click the Cancel ( ) command to reject the RTT and not to display for
all other dispatchers.

6.5.8.4 Radio State

On the Radio State tab, the dispatcher can see the log of radio states for the
radio selected in the Radio List pane (the upper-left-pane of the main window):

In the Radio State pane, the dispatcher can do the following:

Click the Show Notes button to enable the Note column. All notes added by
the administrator and dispatchers for the radio state records will be shown in
the Notes column. So, you can mark radio state records to later find them by
notes.
Click the Add Note button to add a note for the selected radio state record. The
notes will be displayed in the Recent Calls/Events log if the Show Notes mode
enabled:
Click the Add Message button to add a message for dispatchers to the Radio
State log.
6.5.8.5 Active Tasks
On the Active Tasks tab, the dispatcher can monitor all active tasks for the
selected radio (for example, Lone Worker, Active Routes, and other tasks).

The dispatcher can manage active tasks as follows:

Click the Stop button to stop executing the selected task.

6.5 Voice Dispatch 313

 Click the Grouping button to group the tasks. Select the column you want to
group tasks by. Drag and drop the selected column header to the Grouping
field.
Click the Auto Filter button to set a filter for the active tasks. You can filter the
tasks by any parameter. For example, to filter by selected radio select the
Radio column, and start typing the radio name.
Click the Default Settings button to apply default settings to all active tasks.

6.5.8.6 Active Routes

On the Active Routes tab, the dispatcher can monitor all active routes.

The dispatcher can manually set statuses for route checkpoints. To do this,
right-click a route point and from the drop-down menu, select the desired
status.
 Waiting
The checkpoint is waiting to be attended.
 Attended
The checkpoint has been attended on time.
 Unattended
The checkpoint hasn't been attended on time.
 Alarm
The checkpoint is in Alarm mode.
 Note
Click this item to add a note to the selected checkpoint. The note will be
displayed in the pop-up window that appears when hovering the mouse
pointer over the checkpoint.

6.5.8.7 User Activity

• Click the User Activity tab to monitor the activity of radio users:

• Click the Configure button to configure the User Activity list:

314 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.5.8.8 Map
On the Map tab of the Activity Monitor panel, you can monitor location of
radios on the map and simultaneously perform all available actions in the
Radio Interface pane (make voice calls, send messages, disable and enable
selected radios, and other actions):

For more details on map options, see section 6.6, Location Tracking (page 318).
6.5.8.9 Cameras
On the Cameras tab of the Activity Monitor panel, you can monitor cameras
connected to Dispatch Console.

• Click the Add button and select a camera to be displayed on the tab.
Note: You can add up to four cameras to the Cameras tab
view.

6.5.9 Phone Calls

The Phone Connect feature allows making calls from phones to radios and vice
versa.
The phone system must be previously configured by your TRBOnet
administrator.
6.5.9.1 Phone Calls from/to Dispatch Console
To make a phone call from the Dispatch Console:

6.5 Voice Dispatch 315

 • In the Contact Dialer box, select the Line (1), enter the phone number (2)
and click the (3) button.
Terminate a phone call

• In the Contact Dialer box, click the button.

Select a destination from Contacts
• In the Contact Dialer box, click the ellipsis (…) button on the right of the
dial string.
• In the Call Destination dialog box that opens select the desired contact
and click Call.
Answer an incoming call

• In the Contact Dialer box, click the (3) button.

Forward a call
• While in a call, click Menu > Manage Call.

316 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• In the Call dialog box that opens, select the desired contact and click
Forward.
The Forward Call dialog box opens.

• When the second call is established, click OK.

Create a conference call and add participants
• While in a call, click Menu > Manage Call.
• In the Call dialog box that opens, click Conference.
• In the Conference dialog box that opens, click Add.

• In the Add to Conference dialog box that opens, select the desired
contact and click Call.

• When the second call is established, click OK.

6.5 Voice Dispatch 317

 6.5.9.2 Making Phone Calls from Radios
Make a DTMF call

Note: Only 1.07.02 and higher firmware version for all radios
equipped with dialing keyboard support DTMF.

To make a DTMF call, do the following:

 Press the PTT button on a portable radio and hold it.
 While holding the PTT button, dial a phone number and press # (For
example, 0079521112233#).
 Release the PTT button. The server will automatically initiate a phone call.

Call by sending Text Message

To make a phone call, send a text message with the text PrefixN where:
• Prefix – is a short text to define the special text message (for example,
sip:);
• N - the phone number.
For example, to initiate a call to a phone subscriber "123 456 7890", the
following text message must be sent to TRBOnet Server: "sip:1234567890".
Terminate a call
To terminate the call, press the PTT button and then press # twice on the radio.

6.6 Location Tracking

In the Location Tracking tab, the dispatcher can monitor selected radio
location on supported maps, open different maps in separate tabs and toggle
between map tabs:

318 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

The main user interface elements are as follows:

1. Radio List pane
2. Voice panel
3. Map panel
4. Objects panel
5. Activity Monitor panel
While in the Activity Monitor panel, the dispatcher can perform a wide
range of tasks, including:
 Monitoring and listening to recent calls and viewing system events
 Monitoring selected radio state
 Monitoring active tasks for selected radio
 Monitoring active routes for selected radio
 Enabling and disabling User Activity monitoring
 Monitor beacons and beacon events.

6.6.1 Objects
On the Objects panel, the dispatcher can view and enable/disable the following
objects:
• Beacons – all beacons connected to the system.
• Map Objects – all manually created map objects and predefined objects
created with the Map Drawing toolbar.
• Map Regions – all map regions created with the Map Drawing toolbar
(use the Add Polygon tool to create a map region).
• Map Routes – all map routes created with the Map Drawing toolbar (use
the Draw Route tool to create a map route).
In addition, the dispatcher can export and import these objects (see section
6.3.4.3, Exporting/Importing Objects).

6.6 Location Tracking 319

 6.6.1.1 Beacons
TRBOnet Dispatch Software provides the Indoor Positioning feature to
monitor the location of radios inside a building where no GPS signal is
available. This feature requires additional hardware (the beacons spread
around the building and the option boards in radios). A radio user will be
displayed on the indoor floor plan when the radio enters the beacon coverage
area. The beacon icon on the map displays the number of radios that are
currently in the beacon coverage area.

Beacons are displayed on the building floor plan (1) and in the list of beacons
(2) in the Objects panel. When a radio comes into the range of a beacon, they
both are highlighted in yellow on the floor plan/map (3).
For more details on beacons, see section 6.13, Beacons (page 361)
6.6.1.2 Map Objects
The dispatcher can create custom and predefined map objects using the
Drawing Panel. The dispatcher can attach 2D or 3D floor plans for Indoor
Positioning.
For more details on creating map objects, see section 6.6.2.7, Drawing Panel
(page 323).
6.6.1.3 Map Regions
The dispatcher can create map regions that can be used for Geofencing rules.
The map Regions can be created manually on the map (click any point on the
map to select it as a region border) or, the dispatcher can add map points by
GPS coordinates to create a region.
For more details on creating map regions, see section Draw a Polygonal Region
(page 323).

6.6.1.4 Map Routes

The dispatcher can create routes on the map that can be used for Geofencing
rules.

320 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

For more details on creating map routes, see section Draw a Route (page 326).

6.6.2 Map Tools

The Map toolbar is located in the upper part of the Map pane:

6.6.2.1 Zoom in/out

• Click to zoom in a map.

• Click to zoom out a map.

6.6.2.2 Bookmarks
• Click to put a bookmark on the map.
• Click Save as Bookmark to save the map region as a bookmark.

• The dispatcher can create any number of the bookmarks. To open a

bookmark, click and select the bookmark in the list.

6.6.2.3 Default View

• Click and choose Save as Default View to save current map view as a
default view. The dispatcher can save only one default view.
To open the default view, click and choose Show Default View.

6.6.2.4 Filters
Select the filters to display radios on the map:

- radio is online, beacons are detected;

- radio is online, GPS data is received;

- radio is online, no GPS data is received;

- radio is off, no GPS data is received.

All filters are enabled by default. Click the selected icon to disable selected
radios on the map.

6.6 Location Tracking 321

 Click the button and select the visibility of the radios having On Duty
and/or Off Duty states.

Click the button and select which radios to hide according to the radio
groups and/or logical groups they belong to, and the map regions they are
currently in.

Click the button to toggle showing object names on the map.

6.6.2.5 Ruler

• Click to enable the tool to measure distances on the map.

• Left-click a point on the map to start measuring. Left-click intermediate
points and see the distance displayed at the mouse pointer.

6.6.2.6 Search by Address

The dispatcher can search map objects by their address.

Note: For online maps, Internet access is required!

• Click and choose Address to find an address on the map.

• Click the address in the list to display it on the map.

322 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.6.2.7 Drawing Panel

• Click to display the Drawing toolbar:

Draw a Polygonal Region

Draw a polygonal region manually

• Click and choose Draw on the map.

• Left-click points on the map to create the polygonal region.

• Once finished, click the Save link.

In the Object on Map dialog box that opens, specify the following
parameters:

6.6 Location Tracking 323

 General tab
 Name
Specify a name for the map region.
 ID
Enter the ID of the map region.
 Description
Enter a description for the map region.
Region tab
 Color
Select a color to display the region on the map.
 Fill region area
Select this check box to fill in the region area on the map.
 Transparency
Specify the transparency level (in percent) for the fill color.
Logical Groups tab
 Select the Logical Groups that will be associated with the map region.
Draw a polygonal region by coordinates

• Click and choose Specify coordinates.

• Click the Add link to add a point.

 Coordinate system
From the drop-down list, select the convenient format (for example,
Decimal Degrees) for the coordinates.

324 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Latitude/Longitude
Enter the coordinates of the point.
 Click OK to add the point.
• Click the Edit link to edit the selected point.
• Click the Delete link to delete the selected point.
• Once finished editing the region's points, click the Save button.
Draw a Circular Region
Draw a circular region manually

• Click and choose Draw on the map.

• Click on the map to place the center of the region. Drag the sizing handles
to adjust the radius of the region. To change the center position of the
region, click another place on the map.
• Once finished, click the Save link.
In the Object on Map dialog box that opens, specify the following
parameters:
General tab
 Name
Specify a name for the map region.
 ID
Enter the ID of the map region.
 Description
Enter a description for the map region.
Region tab
 Color
Select a color to display the region on the map.
 Fill region area
Select this check box to fill in the region area on the map.
 Transparency
Specify the transparency level (in percent) for the fill color.

6.6 Location Tracking 325

 Logical Groups tab
 Select the Logical Groups that will be associated with the map region.
Draw a circular region by coordinates

• Click and choose Specify coordinates.

In the Circular Region dialog box, specify the following parameters:

 Coordinate system
From the drop-down list, select the convenient format (for example,
Decimal Degrees) for the coordinates.
 Latitude/Longitude
Enter the coordinates of the circle's center.
 Radius
Enter the radius of the circle.
Draw a Route

• Click and then set route points one after another by clicking on the
map.

• Once you have finished drawing a route, click the Save link.
• In the Object on Map dialog box, specify a name and description for the
route.
• Click the Route tab.

326 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Color
Select the color in which to display the route on the map.
 Fill region area
Select this check box to display a transparent edge around the route
line. The edge width is specified by the value of the Tolerance zone
parameter.
• Transparency
Specify the transparency, in percent, for the line edge.
 Tolerance zone
Specify the corridor width (in meters or feet, depending on what is
chosen in Tools > Options > Advanced / Measurement system). If a
radio will pass out of this tolerance zone, the dispatcher will receive an
alarm signal.
Add a Beacon

• Click and choose Place on the map.

• Click on the map where you want to place a beacon.
• Click the Save link.
The Beacon properties dialog box will appear.
• On the General tab, specify the following parameters:

6.6 Location Tracking 327

  Type
Select the beacon type from the drop-down list.
 Name
Specify a name for the beacon.
 Major ID and Minor ID
Enter the beacon’s major and minor ID exactly as specified on the
iBeacon device.
 Description
Add a description for the beacon.
On the Logical Groups tab, select logical groups that will be associated
with the beacon.
On the Cameras tab, select the check box beside the camera that will be
associated with the beacon.
Note: You can also place a beacon by specifying its coordinates. To
do this, click and choose Specify coordinates.

Add a Point of Interest

• Click and choose Place on the map.

• Click on the map where you want to place a POI.
• Click the Save link.
The Object on Map dialog box will appear.

328 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Name
Specify a name for the new map region.
 Description
Enter a description for the map region.
 Bind to PTT
Select this option to connect the POI to a radio group in your radio
system. Clicking the object's icon on the map will start a call on the
selected radio group.
• System
From the drop-down list, select the radio system.
• Group
From the drop-down list, select the radio group.
On the Logical Groups tab, select logical groups that will be associated
with the object.
On the Cameras tab, select the check box beside the camera that will be
associated with the object.

Note: You can also place a POI by specifying its coordinates. To do

this, click and choose Specify coordinates.

Note: Similarly, you can place other objects with predefined icons,
such as Warning points, Police departments, Emergence
departments, Fire departments, Houses, and Cameras. To do
this, click one of the following icons on the toolbar:
.

6.6 Location Tracking 329

 Create a Custom Object
In addition to objects with predefined icons, you can create your own objects to
be then placed on the map.

• Click and choose Add Custom Object.

 Name
Specify a name for the object.
 Select image
Click the Browse button and locate the image file you want to use as an
icon for the object.
Note: You can also assign different images for different icon
sizes. Click the Advanced mode link and select images
for different sizes (16x16, 24x24, 32x32, 48x48).

After you create a custom object, the corresponding icon will appear along with
other predefined icons on the Drawing Panel.

• To delete a custom object, click and choose

Delete Custom Object.
6.6.2.8 Route
Show Route

• Click and choose Show Route.

330 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 In the list of radios, select a radio and the color with which to display
the route for the radio.
 Route Type
Select the route type, either Static or Dynamic.
 Show Route for Last
If the Dynamic route type is selected, specify the time period, in hours,
for which to show the route.
 From/To
If the Static route type is selected, specify the start and end dates of
the time period for which to show the route.
 Route Style
Select the style in which to display the route on the map.
 Optimize Route (group all nearest points)
Select this option to group all points in a 100-meter radius.
 Automatic error correction
Select this option to detect and correct invalid GPS data. Click the
Configure link and select the maximum possible speed for your
vehicles.
 Show Events
Select this option to display TRBOnet Server events (telemetry, alarms,
and other events).
 Show CanLog Events
Select this option to display events that occurred in a vehicle (door
opening, and other events).
Export Route
You can export the routes travelled by radio users in a GPX or KML files. To do
this, after you have performed a Show Route command, click and
choose Export Route > Export to GPX file/ Export to KML file.
Play Back Route

• Click and choose Play Back Route.

6.6 Location Tracking 331

  In the list of radios, select the radio and the color with which to display
the route for the radio.
 From/To
Specify the start and end dates of the time period for which to show
the route.
 Click the Load button.
 Once you have loaded the route points, click the Play button to play
back the route on the map.

6.6.2.9 Geofencing
The Geofencing feature allows controlling the location and speed of radios
relative to manually defined regions on the map.
The Geofencing monitoring consists of the manually defined regions and the
tasks. The regions specify where to apply the rules, while the tasks specify how
to apply the rules for the regions and radios.

• On the Map toolbar, click .

The administrator can add/disable/delete the rules for Geofencing as
well as edit the currently selected rules:

332 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• For more details on configuring Geofencing rules, see section 6.4.5.3,

Geofencing.
• To enable Geofencing rules, go to Administration, Tasks, and in the
Tasks pane, select the check box next to Geofencing.

6.6.2.10 Coverage Map

The Coverage Map option allows to see RSSI levels on the map.

• On the Map toolbar, click .

For more details on configuring the Coverage Maps, see section Coverage Map
(page 133).

6.6.2.11 Select Map

• On the Map toolbar, click .

 Enter the Caption of the map that will be displayed in the active tab.
 In the list of Available Maps, choose the map to be displayed.
Note: For more details on available map types, see section
Map Types (page 124).

6.6.2.12 Google Earth

To open the Google Earth application:

6.6 Location Tracking 333

 • On the Map toolbar, click .
Note: Google Earth must be previously installed on the PC. To
download Google Earth, go to the Google Earth website
https://www.google.com/intl/en/earth/desktop/, and
click Download.

6.7 Job Ticketing

TRBOnet Dispatch Console provides the Job Ticketing feature – the integrated
ticketing system that allows dispatchers to create, assign, and track job tickets
through the radio network.

Note: Before using the feature, make sure that your TRBOnet
Dispatch Software license includes Job Ticketing.

• Click the Job Ticketing tab, and manage Job Tickets in the Job Ticketing
pane.

6.7.1 Adding Statuses for Job Ticketing

• In the Job Ticketing pane, click the Statuses tab to see the statuses
available for job tickets.

334 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Click the Add button to add a Job Ticket status.

 Name
Specify a Job Ticket status name to display in the system.
 Description
Add a description for the job ticket status.
 Action (CPS)
Enter the action name as specified in MOTOTRBO CPS.
Note: The Action (CPS) value must match the value of the
corresponding Action/Response field configured for a
radio in MOTOTRBO CPS, Job Tickets.

 Status
From the drop-down list, select the Job Ticket status (Accepted,
Completed, In Progress, or Rejected).

6.7.2 Adding Custom Fields for Job Ticketing

In addition to the default fields (Priority, Deadline, etc.), you can add custom
fields with pre-defined values to be used in tickets/ticket templates.
• In the Job Ticketing pane, click the Custom Fields tab to see the list of
custom fields available for job tickets.

• Click the Add button.

6.7 Job Ticketing 335

 In the Job Ticket Custom Field dialog box, specify the following:
 Name
Enter a name for the field.
 Values
Click the Add link and enter a pre-defined value for the field.

6.7.3 Creating a Job Ticket

• In the Job Ticketing pane, click the Job Ticketing tab to see the list of
created job tickets.

• Click the Add button to create a job ticket.

Note: To create a ticket from a template, click the arrow on
the right of the Add button to select from the available
ticket templates. For directions on how to create
templates, see section 6.7.4, Creating a Ticket Template.

336 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

In the Job Ticket dialog box, specify the following parameters:

 Ticket ID
This value will be set automatically once the ticket has been created.
 Priority
From the drop-down list, select the task priority.
 Deadline
Select this option and in the box to the right, enter a due date and time
for the task.
 Predefined Texts
From the drop-down list, select a predefined text for the Job Ticket.

• Click the button to edit the predefined text.

• Click the Add link and type the text in the line that appears.
In addition, you can also add to this text:
 Priority
Click this link to add the ticket priority to the text.
 Due date
Click this link to add the ticket due date to the text.

6.7 Job Ticketing 337

  Due time
Click this link to add the ticket due time to the text.
 Text
Enter the text message in this box.
 Notify on status changes
Select this option to send notifications to Dispatchers, Email and/or
SMS groups when a Job Ticket status changes.
 Notify if ticket is not accepted by
Select this option to send notifications to dispatchers, Email and/or
SMS groups if a radio does not accept the Job Ticket at the time
specified in the box below.
 Notification List
Click this link and choose the recipients of selected notifications.

You can notify dispatchers with the help of notifications in the Dispatch
Console (on the Dispatchers tab, check Notify Dispatchers, and select
dispatchers), Email groups by sending Emails to dedicated Email
groups (click the Email tab, check Notify by Email, and select Email
groups) and phone users by sending SMS to dedicated SMS groups
(click the SMS tab, check Notify by SMS, and select SMS groups).
 Comment
Add a comment for the ticket.

6.7.4 Creating a Ticket Template

You can create ticket templates in advance to then use them when creating
tickets.

338 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Click the Templates tab to see the list of templates available for job
tickets.
• Click the Add button to create a ticket template.
• In the Job Ticket Template dialog box, fill in the desired fields, and click
OK.
Note: For information about the fields, see section 6.7.3,
Creating a Job Ticket.

In addition, you can enable automatic creation of the template-based tickets by

using a scheduler. To do this, go to Create Automatically by Scheduler, click
the arrow down button and select the corresponding scheduler. Or, click the
plus button on the right, and create a new scheduler.

6.7.5 Selecting Ticket Status Color

You can also color tickets based on their statuses.
• Click the Job Ticketing tab, and on the toolbar, click the Status Colors
button.

In the Select Job Status Color dialog box that opens:

6.7 Job Ticketing 339

 • Click the arrow on the right, and from the drop-down list, pick the color
for the selected status.

6.7.6 Assigning a Job Ticket

• Select a job ticket in the list, and click the Assign button.
Or, right-click the job ticket and choose Assign.

In the Assign Job Ticket dialog box that appears:

• In the list, select a radio or multiple radios, radio group(s), or logical

group(s) to which to assign the job ticket. To switch between the Radio
List, Radio Groups, and Logical Groups, click the button and select
the desired list.
• Click OK to assign the ticket to the selected radio(s)/radio group(s)/logical
group(s).
As a result, the selected radio(s)/radio group(s)/logical group(s) will
receive the job ticket.

340 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Note: When you assign the job ticket to multiple radios and the first
radio accepts the ticket, the behavior of other radios depends
on the Job Ticketing Service type configured for these radios.
If the Text Messages type is configured for the radios, all
other radios will receive a corresponding text notification.
If the MSI Proprietary type is configured for the radios (or
Mobile Client is used as a radio), the ticket will be cancelled on
all other radios (Mobile Clients).

6.7.7 Viewing Job Ticketing Statistics

• On the main menu, select Tools, then click Job Ticketing Monitoring to
see the Job Ticketing statistic diagram:

For more details on the statistics, see Job Ticketing Monitoring.

6.7.8 Viewing Job Ticketing Reports

• To view a job ticketing report, go to Reports (1), and select
Usage Statistics Reports (2) – Job Ticketing (3).
• On the Usage Statistics Reports pane, click the Report Settings tab, and
specify the appropriate parameters and then click Generate Report.
• Click the Job Ticketing tab to see the generated report.

6.7 Job Ticketing 341

 6.8 Guard Tour / Route Management
The Guard Tour / Route Management feature allows the user to create routes
and assign them to selected radio subscribers or dispatchers.

• Click the Route Management tab (1).

6.8.1 Creating a Route

• In the Route Management pane on the right, select the Management
tab, then click the Create button (2) to create a new route.

342 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Name
Specify a name for the route to display in the route list.
• Description
Add a description for the route.
• Rule
Select the type of the rule from the drop-down-list:
 All checkpoints, strict order, strict schedule
Checkpoints are to be attended in the specified order, each within a
specified time range.
 All checkpoints, strict order, loose schedule
Checkpoints are to be attended in the specified order. The time for
attending each checkpoint is not limited.
 All checkpoints, loose order, loose schedule
Checkpoints can be attended in any order, each at any time.
• Click the Start/Stop Rules tab.
Start Route
Specify the rules to start the route.
 Manually by dispatcher
This option is enabled by default and cannot be edited. This option
enables the dispatcher to start the route by clicking the Start button in
the Route Management tab or in the Active Routes pane.
 Automatically by receiving Text Message from a radio
The route starts when the radio sends a specific text message to
TRBOnet Server. If you select this option, then specify the text message
the radio will send in the Message box.

6.8 Guard Tour / Route Management 343

  Automatically by receiving Telemetry Command from a radio
The route starts when the user presses a preconfigured button on the
radio and TRBOnet Server receives a telemetry command from the
user's radio. If you select this option, specify the VIO contact, and from
the Command drop-down list, select the signal level at which the
user's radio should send the telemetry command.
 Automatically by receiving DTMF command from a radio
The route starts when the user sends a specific DTMF command to
TRBOnet Server, for instance, #11#. If you select this option, specify a
DTMF combination without the # characters in the Command box.
 Automatically by receiving Status from a radio
The route starts when the user sends a specific Status to TRBOnet
Server, for instance, 1. If you select this option, specify the Status.
 Wait for confirmation from a radio
Select this option to start the route after the TRBOnet Server receives a
confirmation from the radio. In this case, the route is assigned to the
radio or user and paused. The route will be resumed after a
confirmation is received.
Pause Route
Specify the rules to pause the route.
Resume Route
Specify the rules to resume the route.
Finish Route
Specify the rules to finish or stop the route.
 Automatically after all points have been attended
Select this option so that the route is finished automatically after all
checkpoints have been attended.
 Limit route processing time
Select this option, and specify the maximum allowed time in the Max.
Time box. If the time is exceeded, the route will stop automatically. All
unattended checkpoints automatically change their statuses from
'Waiting' to 'Not Attended'.
• In the Route dialog box, click the Route Points tab.

344 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Click the GPS Points link (1) to add points to the selected map:

 Select the map. For more details on map types, see section Map Types
(page 124).
 Click the Create link or double-click a selected point on the map to
create a new route point:

 Name
Specify a name for new point to display on the map.
 Location
This box displays the current GPS coordinates of new point.
 Radius
Specify the radius within which to consider the point as attended.
 Intermediate way point (not served)
Select this option to exclude the point from being used as a
checkpoint.
 Time
Specify the time the point is to be attended at.
 Time delta
Specify the time accuracy to attend the point.
 Click OK to add the new point.
 Click the Beacons link (2) to add a beacon as a checkpoint.

6.8 Guard Tour / Route Management 345

 Note: To enable the Indoor feature, make sure your license
includes Indoor Positioning (see section 5.1 License
Information on page 11) and Indoor Service is selected
in the list of available services (see section 5.9.1 Services
on page 30).

 Click the Create link and then click a beacon in the list.

 Click the Map Objects link to add a map object as a checkpoint.

 Click the Create link and then click an object in the list.

• In the Route dialog box, click the Checkpoint Statuses tab.

346 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Set status to Attended

Select this option so that TRBOnet Server will change the checkpoint
status to 'Attended' based on the information from the radio.
 When the radio enters the point area
Choose this option so that the radio detects the closest beacon and
sends location data to TRBOnet Server. The respective checkpoint
changes its status to 'Attended ' automatically.
 By condition when the radio is in the point area
If this option is chosen, the radio sends a preconfigured command to
TRBOnet Server. The last detected checkpoint changes its status to
'Attended ' by this command. Configure the preferred command(s):
• Automatically by receiving Text Message from a radio
Select this option so that the checkpoint is considered to be
attended after the dispatcher receives a specific text message from
the radio. If you select this option, then specify the text message the
radio will send in the Message box.
• Automatically by receiving Telemetry Command from a radio
Select this option so that the checkpoint is considered to be
attended after the dispatcher receives a specific telemetry
command from the radio. If you select this option, specify the VIO
contact, and from the Command drop-down list, select the signal
level at which the user's radio should send the telemetry command.
• Automatically by receiving DTMF command from a radio
Select this option so that the checkpoint is considered to be
attended after the dispatcher receives a specific DTMF command
from the radio, for instance, #11#. If you select this option, specify a
DTMF combination without the # characters in the Command box.

6.8 Guard Tour / Route Management 347

 • Automatically by receiving Status from a radio
Select this option so that the checkpoint is considered to be
attended after the dispatcher receives a specific Status from the
radio. If you select this option, specify the Status.
• Statuses that can be set by dispatcher
Select this option to allow the Dispatch Control operator to manually
change the status of checkpoints in the Active Routes panel.
In the drop-down list, select the checkpoint statuses to be available for
the operator: Waiting, Attended, Unattended, and Alarm.
• Set status to Alarm
Select this option to allow the radio to set an alarm on the attended
checkpoint. Configure the command(s) that can set the checkpoint status
to 'Alarm'.
 Automatically by receiving Text Message from a radio
Select this option to set the point to alarm mode after the dispatcher
receives a specific text message from the radio. If you select this
option, then specify the text message the radio will send in the
Message box.
 Automatically by receiving Telemetry Command from a radio
Select this option to set the point to alarm mode after the dispatcher
receives a specific telemetry command from the radio. If you select this
option, specify the VIO contact, and from the Command drop-down
list, select the signal level at which the user's radio should send the
telemetry command.
 Automatically by receiving DTMF command from a radio
Select this option to set the point to alarm mode after the dispatcher
receives a specific DTMF command from the radio. If you select this
option, specify a DTMF combination without the # characters in the
Command box.
 Automatically by receiving Emergency from a radio
Select this option to set the point to alarm mode after the dispatcher
receives an Emergency from the radio.
• Emg. Type
Select the Emergency type from the drop-down list.
 Automatically by receiving Status from a radio
Select this option to set the point to alarm mode after the dispatcher
receives a specific Status from the radio. If you select this option,
specify the Status.
• In the Route dialog box, click the Notifications tab to manage
notifications to a radio.

348 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Note: To enable an option, select the check box. The Text

Message boxes already include text. If necessary,
replace the text with your own text, using variables as
placeholders that will be substituted with actual data.

 Send a Text Message on route assign

Select this option to inform a radio holder that the route is assigned to.
 Send a Text Message on route start
Select this option to inform a radio holder that the route started.
 Send a Text Message on route suspend
Select this option to inform a radio holder that the route is suspended.
 Send a Text Message on route resume
Select this option to inform a radio holder that the route is resumed.
 Send a Text Message on route finish
Select this option to inform a radio holder that the route is finished.
 Send a Text Message when approaching attendance time
Select this option to inform a radio holder that the next checkpoint is
expected in the time interval specified in the Time before attendance
box. This message is only available for routes with the specified
attendance time.
 Send a Text Message after point is attended
Select this option to confirm attending a checkpoint.
 Send a Text Message if point is not attended
Select this option to notify a radio holder if the point was not attended.
 Send a Text Message if point is in alarm mode
Select this option to notify radio holder if the point is in alarm mode.
• In the Route dialog box, click the Logical Groups tab.

6.8 Guard Tour / Route Management 349

  Select a logical group(s) in the list of available groups.
 Assign Logical Groups to a radio when the route starts
Select this check box so that when the route is assigned to a radio, the
selected logical group(s) will automatically be assigned to the radio.
Note: For more information about logical groups, see section
6.4.29, Logical Groups (page 269).

• Click OK to save settings.

The new route is now added to the route list (1):

6.8.2 Starting a Route

• Click the Start button (2) to start the route:

350 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

In the Start Route dialog box, specify the following parameters:

 Name
Enter a name for the route to be started. This name will be displayed in
the Active Routes pane.
 Start Date
Select a date to start the route on.
 Route
From the drop-down list, select the route to start. Click the Create
Route button to create a new route based on the selected route. Click
the Modify button to modify selected route parameters.
 Radio
From the drop-down list, select the radio to assign the route to.
 Radio Owner
From the drop-down list, select the Users to assign the route to.
Note: Select only one of the two (Radio or Radio Owner) to
prevent an incorrect route.

 Dispatcher
From the drop-down list, select the dispatcher to monitor the route.
 Click OK to start the route.
The active route appears (1) in the Active Routes panel.

6.8 Guard Tour / Route Management 351

 If a route point is attended in time, it is displayed in green (2)
If a route point is not attended in time, it is displayed in red (3).
For more operations with checkpoints, see section 6.5.8.6, Active Routes
(page 314).

6.8.3 Tracing Active Route on Map

• In the Route Management pane, click the Monitoring tab (1).

• In the upper-left pane, select the route (2) to be traced on the map.

6.8.4 Stopping a Route

Depending on the route configuration settings, a route/guard tour can be
stopped automatically:
• by a command sent from the radio;
• when all checkpoints are attended;
• when the route time is elapsed.
To manually stop the route:
• Click the Stop button to stop the route. Once the route is stopped, it will
disappear from the Active Routes panel.
After the route is stopped, the checkpoint statuses cannot be modified neither
automatically, nor manually.

6.8.5 Generating Route Reports

The administrator can generate reports on the finished routes.
• Click the Reports (1) tab, and in the Reports pane select Common
reports > Completed Routes (2):

352 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.9 Text Messages

In the Text Messages tab, the dispatcher can review and send text messages to
other dispatchers, individual radio subscribers and radio groups:

1. Radio List
displays dispatchers and radio subscribers available for text
communication.
Note: Radios must be equipped with a display to receive Text
Messages.

2. Text Messages panel

displays the latest messages transmitted via a radio channel.
3. New Message panel
provides you with text sending options.

6.9 Text Messages 353

 4. Calls Panel in compact mode
allows making voice calls.

6.9.1 Sending Text Messages

The dispatcher can send a text message to:
• Selected Radio
• Selected Radio Group
• Selected Logical Group
• Selected Dispatcher
• All Online Dispatchers or a group of dispatchers
The dispatcher can send a text message to selected subscribers from:
• New Message panel
• Radio List

6.9.1.1 New Message panel

• In the New Message panel, click the ellipsis (…) button.

• In the Select Destination dialog box, select the radio, radio group or
dispatcher and click OK.
• Type the text message you want to send.
Note: The size of a text message is restricted to 125
characters.

• Click the Attach File button if you want to attach a file to the message
being sent.
• Click the Send button.
The text message will be displayed in the Text Messages panel.

354 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

The message details highlighted in red indicates that the message recipient is
offline and the message will be delivered as soon as the recipient gets back
online again.
The message details in grey indicates that the message has been delivered.
6.9.1.2 Radio List
• On the Radio List, right-click the radio/radio group/dispatcher you want
to send a text message to, and choose Send Message.

• In the Send Text Message dialog box that appears, specify the following
parameters:

 Destination
This box displays the destination of the message.
 In the Text box, type the message text. You can also insert a template
text from the Templates list box. Note that the size of a text message
is restricted to 125 characters.
 In the Destination list, add recipients of the text message by selecting
radios/radio groups/logical groups/dispatchers.
 Send to offline radios
Select this option to store the message on the server if a radio is
offline, and to send it as soon as the radio becomes online.
Note: The storage time is set in TRBOnet Server's Advanced
Settings > Text Message Passive timeout (Unlimited,
by default).

6.9 Text Messages 355

  Click Send.

6.9.2 Extended Messages

The Extended Messages service is a special function allowing users to
send/receive detailed preconfigured templates containing necessary
information.
This service was created especially for clients who need to use more detailed
and structured messages in their work. If the standard messages are not
enough to contain all the information you need to send, you may use the
Extended Messages service. Also note that an extended message can only be
viewed on a Dispatch Console.
6.9.2.1 Send Extended Text Message to a Radio

• Click the Text Messages tab (1).

• Click the View menu, and select Show Extended Messages Tab (2).
• In the Text Messages pane, click the Extended tab (3), and New
message (4).

• Select the template in the list (1). For instructions on how to create
templates, see section 6.4.21.1, Templates for Extended Messages.

356 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• From the drop-down list (2), select the radio to which to send the
extended message.
• Click Send to Radio (3) to send the extended message to the selected
radio.

6.10 Voice Recording

On the Voice Recording tab, the dispatcher can display the list of voice calls
recordings according to certain criteria, listen to the voice recordings and save
them to a file.

• Click the Voice Recording tab (1).

• In the Voice Recording panel, specify the criteria according to which you
want to display call recordings, and click Load Data (2).
• In the right pane, you will see the list of calls according to the criteria you
have specified.
• To play back a recording, select it in the list and click Playback (3).
Note: For more actions available in the Voice Recording panel, see
section 6.5.8.1, Recent Calls/Events, Voice Recording.

6.11 Reports
The Reports tool provides you with various printing forms with monitored radio
network activity data.
• Click the Reports tab.

6.11 Reports 357

 6.11.1 Report Types
TRBOnet Dispatch Console supports the following report types:
• General Information
These reports contain general information on the radio systems
registered in TRBOnet.
• Current Reports
These reports contain current information on the radio systems
registered in TRBOnet.
• System Reports
These reports contain system information on the radio systems
registered in TRBOnet.
• Usage Statistics Reports
These reports provide information on various activities that occurred in
the radio systems during a specified time range. The reported
information may include information about Messages, Radio States, User
Events and Notes, Allocated Radios, Disabled Radios, Job Ticketing,
Completed Routes etc.
• Location History
These reports contain movement details for GPS and Indoor Positioning,
for a selected time period.
• Security Reports
These reports contain information related to security issues that may
affect the radio systems connected to TRBOnet.
• Data Export
This report contains information on extended notes in the messages. The
report can be generated in XLS or XML format.

6.11.2 Main Report Parameters

To generate a report, go to Reports section and select a report type you want
to generate.

358 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

When generating a report, you might need to specify the parameters listed
below:
Time Range
• Start
The date from which to start the report.
• End
The date on which to end the report.
Filter Content
• Message Type
Select available message types from the drop-down list (All Messages,
Talk Sessions, Text Messages, and other message types).
• Radio System
In the drop-down list, select the system(s) to include in a report.
• Radio
In the drop-down list, select the radio(s) to include in a report.
• Radio Group
In the drop-down list, select the radio group(s) to include in a report.
• Logical Group
In the drop-down list, select the logical group(s) to include in a report.
• Dispatcher
In the drop-down list, select the dispatcher(s) to include in a report.
• Radio ID
Enter the Radio ID or multiple Radio IDs.
• Find Text
Enter the text to filter by.

6.11.3 Common Command Buttons

Below are the buttons common for all reports that you generate:
• Generate Report
Click this button to generate a report according to the selected report
settings.
• Save Report Profile
Click this button to save the current report settings as a report profile.
• Delete Report Profile
Click this button to delete the currently selected report profile.

6.12 Radio Allocation

The radio can be assigned to a selected employee registered in the system.

6.12 Radio Allocation 359

 All available radios are disabled and an employee will need to type in a
username and password to take and enable the selected radio. When an
employee returns the allocated radio, it gets disabled again.
• Click the Radio Allocation tab (1) to assign radios to users:

• Select the radio in the list and click the Take/Return Radio button (2):

 Radio
This box displays the selected radio.
 User
From the drop-down list, select the user to allocate the radio to.
 Password
Enter the password for the selected user.
Note: For more details on user access to Allocation Console,
see section 6.4.28 Users (page 265).

• Click the Take Radio button to assign the radio to the selected user.
You can also add required allocation data by clicking the Add Missing Data
button (3) and selecting either Manually or From File from the drop-down
menu.
In addition, the administrator can generate reports on the allocated radios.
• Click the Reports (1) tab, and in the Reports pane, select
Usage Statistics Reports > Radio Allocation (2):

360 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

6.13 Beacons
TRBOnet Dispatch Console provides the Indoor Positioning feature to monitor
the location of radios inside a building where GPS signals are not present. The
feature requires additional hardware (beacons located around the building and
Bluetooth modules/option boards installed in radios).

Note: To enable the Indoor Location Tracking feature, your license

must include Indoor Positioning (see section 5.1, License
Information) and Indoor Service is selected in the list of
available services (see section 5.9.1, Services).

A radio unit will be displayed on the indoor floor plan at the beacon location as
soon as the radio enters the beacon's coverage area.
Hovering over the beacon icon on the map will provide a count of the number
of radios (mobile devices) that are currently in this beacon's coverage area (for
example, Room 1(3) - there are 3 radios in Room 1).
In addition, you can view devices that were last seen near the beacon. Right-
click the beacon on the map and, on the shortcut menu that appears, choose
Show Nearby Devices. As a result, you will see the list of devices that were last
seen near this beacon and have not yet detected another beacon. If you select
the lower check box, this list won't contain last seen devices that have already
sent a new GPS fix.

6.13 Beacons 361

 6.13.1 Adding a Floorplan
Click the Location Tracking tab (1), then click Map (2) and choose Open New
Map in Tab:

 Map Type
From the drop-down list, select 'Beacon 2D' to enable 2D floor plan, or
'Beacon 3D' to enable 3D floor plan (3).
 Click Add (4), and browse for the required map on your PC.
 Click OK (5) to add the map.

6.13.1.1 Floor Plan Toolbar

The Floor Plan pane's toolbar is located in the upper part of the Floor Plan
pane:

1. Zoom in/out
Click the Zoom buttons to zoom in/out the floor plan.

362 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

2. Default View
Click the arrow beside and choose Save as Default View to save
current floor plan as a default view. The dispatcher can save only one
default view.
To open the default view, click the arrow beside and choose Show
Default View.
3. Set Location
Click the Set Location button to manually set a beacon on the floor plan.
4. Available beacons drop-down list
Select a beacon from the list and click the Set Location button to put the
selected beacon on the floor plan. If you are going to add a beacon, select
'New Beacon' from the drop-down list and click the Set Location button
to add a beacon to the floor plan.
5. Show Beacons
The dispatcher can select which beacon types to display on the floor plan.
 All – all beacons are displayed on the map.
 With Radios – beacons with attached radios are displayed on the map.
 Without Radios – beacons without radios are displayed on the map.
 In Alarm - beacons in Alarm mode are displayed on the map.
 No – all beacons are hidden on the map.
6. Show Info
From the drop-down list, select which information to display for beacons.
7. Images
From the drop-down list, select an image size for beacon icons.
8. Route
 Click Route > Show Route to display a route traveled by the radio for
the selected time period.

• Radio
Select the radio to display the route for.
• From/To
Specify the time period to show the route for.

6.13 Beacons 363

 • Color
Select a color to display the route with.
• Click OK to show the route for the selected radio.
 Click Route > Play Back Route.

• Select the time period to request data for.

• Select the radio(s) to request data for. Click Select All to display
history for all radios registered in the system. Click Clear All to
cancel radio selection.
• Click Load to load the history.
9. Overview
Click this button to view the entire floor plan.
10. Select Map
Click this button to change the map displayed in the current tab.

6.13.2 Adding a Beacon to the Floor Plan

• Click the Set Location button (1) and then click on the map to point the
location of a physical beacon on the floor.
• In the dialog box that appears (2), specify the beacon properties.

364 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

 Type
Select the beacon type from the drop-down list (K-Term or iBeacon).
 Name
Specify a name for the beacon.
 Major ID and Minor ID
Enter the beacon’s major and minor ID exactly as specified on the
iBeacon device.
Or, if a K-Term beacon is being added:
 Beacon ID
Enter the beacon’s ID exactly as specified on the K-Term device.
 Description
Add a description for the beacon.

6.13.3 Editing Beacon Parameters

• Select a beacon in the Objects panel and double-click to edit its
parameters.

6.13 Beacons 365

 • In the Beacon properties dialog box that appears, edit the desired
properties.
Note: For more details on K-Term beacons, see the following
article at https://trbonet.com/kb/how-to-find-out-a-
beacon-id/.

6.13.4 Unregistered Beacons

If the radio detects an unregistered beacon, this beacon will appear in the
Unregistered Beacons folder at the top of the Objects pane.

To add an unregistered beacon to the Dispatch Console, right-click it and

choose Add Beacon on the shortcut menu.

366 6 TRBOnet Dispatch Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

7 TRBOnet Web Console

TRBOnet Web Console is a special online application. It is an extension for
TRBOnet Dispatch Software which allows dispatchers to get access to the
system via a Web browser. The Web Console is the best solution for carriers,
operators and systems with a huge number of users.
This application allows you to monitor your system without any special
software installed on your computer.

7.1 Installing Web Console

• Click Start>Control Panel>Programs and Features.
• Click the Turn Windows features on or off link.

• In the Windows Features dialog box, expand Internet Information

Services:
 Expand Web Management Tools and make sure that
IIS Management Console is selected.
 Go to World Wide Web Services>Application Development Features
and make sure all of them are selected.
 In addition, expand Common HTTP Features and make sure that
Static Content is selected.

7.1 Installing Web Console 367

 • Restart your PC.
• Click Start>All Programs>Accessories>Command Prompt.

• For 32-bit systems:

Go to This PC>Local Disk (C: )> Windows > Microsoft.NET > Framework
> v4.0.30319/aspnet_regiis.
For 64-bit systems:
Go to This PC>Local Disk (C: )> Windows > Microsoft.NET >
Framework64 > v4.0.30319/aspnet_regiis.

• Drag the aspnet_regiis file into the Command Prompt then press the
space bar and add the -i key. Then press the Enter key:

368 7 TRBOnet Web Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Go to Control Panel > Administrative Tools.

• Double-click the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager shortcut
and double-click ISAPI and CGI Restrictions.

• In the Restriction column, set Allowed in all lines.

• Copy the Web Site archive WebConsole to Computer > Local Disc (C: )
>inetpub to create a folder for the Web Console.
• Go to Application Pools (1). Double-click DefaultAppPool (2) and check
the .Net CLR Version (3):

7.1 Installing Web Console 369

 • Click Sites (1), right-click Default Web Site (2) and choose View
Applications (3):

• Click the Add Application link.

• Specify the Alias and Physical path for the application:

370 7 TRBOnet Web Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Browse for the folder with unarchived Web Console.

• Click OK.
• Select Application Pools (1) and click the Set Application Pool Defaults
link (2):

• Set Enable 32-Bit Applications to True (3).

The Web Console will be added as an application to under the Default
Web Site:

Note: Make sure your account has sysadmin privileges and

the database connection is successful (see section 5.2,
TRBOnet Server Database on page 14).

7.2 Configuring Web Console

• If TRBOnet Server is not installed on your PC, select the application and
click Application Settings:

7.2 Configuring Web Console 371

 • Specify the IP address and Port of the PC with installed TRBOnet Server:

• Right click TRBOnet Web Console and choose Edit Permissions.

• Click the Security tab and then click the Edit button to edit permissions:

• Select User in the Users list. In the Allow column, select Write:

372 7 TRBOnet Web Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Click Apply.
• Click OK.
To open TRBOnet Web Console:
• Go to Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager > Connections
>Sites > Default Web Site > TRBOnet
• Right-click it and choose Manage Application > Browse.

TRBOnet Web Console is now ready for operation.

7.3 Using Web Console

7.3.1 Connecting to TRBOnet Server

• Launch the browser.
• In the browser's address bar, enter the IP address of the PC with the
installed TRBOnet Web Console, and the path (for example,
10.10.100.99/TRBOnet).
Note: For the path, see section 7.1, Installing Web Console,
IIS Manager>Add Application>Alias

As a result, the TRBOnet Login page will open:

7.3 Using Web Console 373

 • Login
Enter the User Name registered in the TRBOnet Dispatch Console Users
list.
• Password
Enter the user password.
• Click Connect.
Once you have connected to TRBOnet Server, you will see a window like this.

7.3.2 Radio List

The Radio List pane is located on the left and contains the list of radios. From
this pane, you can perform the following tasks.

Click the button to see the selected radio in the center of the map.

Click the button to button to display a route traveled by the selected radio
on the map.

374 7 TRBOnet Web Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Specify the From and To date and time. Select the Optimize Route option to
group all points in a 100-meter radius.

Click the button to request a location of the selected radio.

Click the button to display the selected radio properties.

7.3.2.1 Disabling a radio

To disable a radio:
• Right-click the desired radio in the Radio List pane.
• In the shortcut menu that opens, click Disable.
• Enter the Reason and click OK.
Note: The dispatcher can disable a radio when they have relevant
Access Rights.

7.3.3 Map
7.3.3.1 Map Layers
• Click the small plus button on the right of the Map pane.
• Choose the map layer to display in the Map pane.
• In the Overlays list, select whether to display Regions, Map Objects and
Radios on the map. Just select/clear the corresponding check box.

7.3 Using Web Console 375

 7.3.3.2 Zoom In/Out
• Click the large plus button on the left of the Map pane to zoom in the
map.
• Click the large minus button on the left of the Map pane to zoom out the
map.
Or:
• Use the mouse wheel to zoom in/out the map.

7.3.3.3 Radio Coordinates and Address

• In the Map pane, click the radio you want to inspect.
As a result, a window will appear displaying the coordinates and address
of the inspected radio.

7.3.3.4 Filter Radios

You can filter the display of radios on the map. To do this, use the colored car
buttons at the top of the Map pane.

376 7 TRBOnet Web Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Click to remove radios that are online and have a detected beacon
position from the map view. Click this button again to bring them back to
be displayed.

• Click to remove radios that are online and have a detected GPS
position from the map view. Click this button again to bring them back to
be displayed.

• Click to remove radios that are online and have no detected GPS
position from the map view. Click this button again to bring them back to
be displayed.

• Click to remove radios that are offline and have no detected GPS
position from the map view. Click this button again to bring them back to
be displayed.

• Click and select the visibility of the radios having On Duty and/or Off
Duty states.

7.3.3.5 Search by address

• In the Find Address box, enter the address you want to locate on the map.
• Click the lens button on the right.
• In the Found addresses window, click the address to locate it on the map.

7.3.4 Text Messages

With TRBOnet Web Console, you can send text messages to radios/radio
groups/dispatchers.
• Click the Messages tab at the top of the window.
• Click the Send Text button.

7.3 Using Web Console 377

 In the Send Text Message window that appears:
 Enter the text of the message.
 Select the radios/radio groups/dispatchers to send the message to.
 Select the Send to Offline option to send the message to offline
radios.

7.3.5 Job Ticketing

With TRBOnet Web Console, you can create, assign, and track job tickets
through the radio network.
• Click the Job Ticketing tab at the top of the window.

In the upper pane, you see the list of created job tickets. In the lower pane,
there are assigned job tickets.
7.3.5.1 Add a Job Ticket
• Click the Add button.

378 7 TRBOnet Web Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Ticket ID
This value will be set automatically once the ticket has been created.
• Text
Enter the text message in this box.
• Enable Deadline
Select this option and in the End Time box, specify a due date and time
for the task.
• Priority
From the drop-down list, select the task priority level.
• Comment
Enter a comment for the ticket.
• Click OK.
Once you have added a ticket, it will appear in the list of tickets in the upper
pane.
7.3.5.2 Assign a Job Ticket
Select the job ticket in the upper pane, and click the Assign button.

• In the list, select a radio(s), radio or logical group to which to assign the
job ticket.
• Click OK to assign the task to selected radio(s).
As a result, the selected radio will receive the job ticket. The assigned job
ticket will appear in the upper pane.

7.3 Using Web Console 379

 7.3.6 Reports
• Click the Reports tab at the top of the window.

• In the right pane, select report parameters and click Generate Report.
Once the report is generated, you will see it in a separate tab of your Web
browser.

You can print the report, save it as a file, and so forth.

380 7 TRBOnet Web Console

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

7.3.7 Alarms
When an alarm is received from a radio, the radio icon will turn red, and a
corresponding Information window will pop up displaying the radio's name,
coordinates, and speed.

7.3 Using Web Console 381

 Appendix A: Backing up and Restoring Database
and Audio Recordings
Configure Backup
TRBOnet Dispatch Software has an automatic mechanism for database and
audio recordings backup. Initially, it defaults to two paths to store database
and audio recordings:
%ProgramData%\Neocom Software\TRBOnet.Plus\Backups and
%ProgramData%\Neocom Software\TRBOnet.Plus\Audio.
For your convenience, the default paths can be changed:
• Open TRBOnet Server and stop the TRBOnet Server service.

• To customize these backup folders, on the Configuration pane, select

Database, then select the Specify the path for database archives and
Use custom folder for audio files options. Next, enter the new (custom)
folder for the backup database (for example, C:\TRBOnet\Backup\DB)
and custom folder for the audio files (for example,
C:\TRBOnet\Backup\Audio). The database and audio backups will be
stored in the selected directories.
Note: Older backups are not deleted automatically. It is
recommended that you regularly delete the files you no
longer need to avoid running out of storage space.

382 Appendix A: Backing up and Restoring Database and Audio Recordings

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Save your changes and restart the service.

Back up Database and Audio Recordings

To back up the database and audio recordings, do the following:
• In the Dispatch Console go to Administration (1), and select Database
(2) in the Navigation tree.
• Click the Back Up Database (3) button:

• Specify the backup details:

Back up Database and Audio Recordings 383

  Back up audio
Select to back up audio recordings.
 Remove
Select to remove audio files and data from the database.
 Remove all data older than date
Specify the date to remove data older than that specified date.
 Audio Files
Select to remove audio files.
 Data
Select to remove data.
 Click OK to run the backup procedure.
The Backup progress bar will be displayed in the lower-right corner.
1. In a while, a ZIP archive will be created in two possible directories:
• The default directory is %ProgramData%\Neocom
Software\TRBOnet.Plus\Audio for Audio files and
%ProgramData%\Neocom Software\TRBOnet.Plus\Backups for
backup files.
• The custom directory is specified in TRBOnet Server settings.
2. The archive includes the database backup file and audio recordings files.
The archive name contains the date of backup. New backup files will be
placed in the same directory.

384 Appendix A: Backing up and Restoring Database and Audio Recordings

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

For TRBOnet.Plus:

Restore Database
To restore the database
• Open TRBOnet Server and stop the TRBOnet Server service.

Restore Database 385

 • Unzip the backup archive and open the folder:

• Run SQL Server Management Studio with sufficient rights to manage

databases.

• Select Database in the navigation tree (for example, TRBOnet):

386 Appendix A: Backing up and Restoring Database and Audio Recordings

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Right-click the selected database, and go to Tasks/Restore/Database:

Select Database backup properties:

• In the Destination group, type in or select Database name to back up to
from the drop-down list (for example, TRBOnet).
• In the Source group, click Device.
• Click the ellipsis (…) button to select the directory with database backup:

Restore Database 387

 • Click Add and select the directory to which you unarchived the database
backup (for example, C:\TRBOnet\Backup\DB).

Note: Select the *.bak file type.

• Click OK to add the directory.

• Click OK.
The database is added to the list of restored databases.

• Select the check box and click OK to restore the database.

• In the Configuration pane, select Database.

388 Appendix A: Backing up and Restoring Database and Audio Recordings

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• From the Database drop-down list, select the restored database.

• Click Test Connection to check the connection to the database.

• Click Upgrade Database to upgrade the database if the current database
was restored from the database version lower than current.
• Click the Save changes and restart service link.

Restore Audio Recordings

To restore the audio file:
• Launch TRBOnet Server and stop the TRBOnet Server service.

Restore Audio Recordings 389

 • Go to Database section in the navigation tree and specify custom
directory for audio files (for example, C:\TRBOnet.Plus\Backup\Audio).

• Go to the directory you specified to store backup audio files.

• Unzip the backup archive:

• Copy unarchived audio files to the folder specified in TRBOnet Server

settings (for example, C:\ProgramData\TRBOnet Dispatch Software
\Audio):

390 Appendix A: Backing up and Restoring Database and Audio Recordings

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

• Click the Save changes and restart service link.

Thus, the audio files will be restored.

Schedule Backups
To set a scheduled backup for the database and audio recordings, do the
following:
• In the Dispatch Console, go to Administration section and select
Database in the Navigation tree:
• Click the Schedule Backup button:

Schedule Backups 391

 • In the dialog box that appears, specify the Backup details:

• Enable scheduler
Check to enable the database backup scheduler.
• Scheduler
Click the arrow button on the right, and on the drop-down list select the
required scheduler(s). Or, click the plus button on the right, and create a
new scheduler.
For directions on how to create schedulers, see section 6.4.22, Schedulers.
• Backup data
Check to back up data.
• Backup audio
Check to back up audio recording.
• Remove
Check to remove audio files and data from the database.
 Remove all data older than [X] days
Select the number of days to remove all data.
 Audio Files
Check to remove audio files.
 Data
Check to remove data.
• Click OK to run the backup procedure.

392 Appendix A: Backing up and Restoring Database and Audio Recordings

TRBOnet PLUS — User Manual

Appendix B: SIP Setup for Motorola Phone System

The native MOTOTRBO phone system is supported in the case of a direct IP
connection to the repeater. MOTOTRBO Phone system is recommended for IP
Site Connect mode.

Note: No extra license per repeater is required for Digital Phone

Patch from Motorola.

TRBOnet Software and Repeaters

TRBOnet Server requires a specific setup for a repeater in the IP Site Connect
mode as well as for SIP in order to make the phone system work properly.

Note: MOTOTRBO Phone System is available for repeaters in IP Site

Connect mode. For a system based on the control stations, use
TRBOnet Phone System.

Launch MOTOTRBO CPS and go to Repeater's General > General Settings:

The Radio ID of the repeaters in CPS must differ from the TRBOnet Peer ID.
TRBOnet Dispatch Console acts as another virtual peer repeater with a Peer ID.
For example, given an IPSC network consisting of 1 master and 3 peers, the
repeaters' IDs (Radio IDs in CPS codeplugs for the repeaters) in this example
would be 1, 2, 3, 4. The TRBOnet Peer ID must not be a value of 1, 2, 3, or 4, and
must differ from all the repeaters (the master and all peers), otherwise a
conflict will happen in the network as there are multiple peers with the same
ID. The default TRBOnet Radio ID is 64250.
• Open TRBOnet Dispatch Console.
• Go to Administration (1), Phone Calls (2), Configuration (3), Configure
(4) and set Access code and Deaccess code (5) to 0 and #, respectively:

TRBOnet Software and Repeaters 393

 Programming Radios
A special setup is required for radios in MOTOTRBO CPS.
• Read a subscriber's radio in CPS and go to Systems > Phone Systems >
System (1):

• Make sure that Gateway ID (2) is equal to TRBOnet Peer ID in the

Repeater settings of TRBOnet Server.
• Set Access Code to 0 and Deaccess Code to #, respectively (3).
• Go to Zone/Channel Assignment >…> Zone> Channel (1) and select the
Phone System you have previously specified (2):

394 Appendix B: SIP Setup for Motorola Phone System